WO2021092939A1 - 一种通信方法及装置 - Google Patents

一种通信方法及装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021092939A1
WO2021092939A1 PCT/CN2019/118924 CN2019118924W WO2021092939A1 WO 2021092939 A1 WO2021092939 A1 WO 2021092939A1 CN 2019118924 W CN2019118924 W CN 2019118924W WO 2021092939 A1 WO2021092939 A1 WO 2021092939A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
terminal device
beams
directions
reference signals
available
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2019/118924
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
焦春旭
袁璞
向铮铮
卢磊
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority to EP19952901.7A priority Critical patent/EP4033852A4/en
Priority to CN201980098691.4A priority patent/CN114175846B/zh
Priority to PCT/CN2019/118924 priority patent/WO2021092939A1/zh
Publication of WO2021092939A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021092939A1/zh
Priority to US17/663,347 priority patent/US12218736B2/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0686Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0695Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission using beam selection
    • H04B7/06952Selecting one or more beams from a plurality of beams, e.g. beam training, management or sweeping
    • H04B7/06964Re-selection of one or more beams after beam failure
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0686Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0695Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission using beam selection
    • H04B7/06952Selecting one or more beams from a plurality of beams, e.g. beam training, management or sweeping
    • H04B7/06954Sidelink beam training with support from third instance, e.g. the third instance being a base station
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/08Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the receiving station
    • H04B7/0868Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and combining
    • H04B7/088Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and combining using beam selection
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • H04L5/0051Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver of dedicated pilots, i.e. pilots destined for a single user or terminal
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W16/00Network planning, e.g. coverage or traffic planning tools; Network deployment, e.g. resource partitioning or cells structures
    • H04W16/24Cell structures
    • H04W16/28Cell structures using beam steering
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/10Scheduling measurement reports ; Arrangements for measurement reports
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W64/00Locating users or terminals or network equipment for network management purposes, e.g. mobility management
    • H04W64/006Locating users or terminals or network equipment for network management purposes, e.g. mobility management with additional information processing, e.g. for direction or speed determination
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • H04W76/19Connection re-establishment

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of mobile communication technology, and in particular to a communication method and device.
  • FR2 has rich spectrum resources and a large bandwidth range. It provides data transmission channels for a variety of new services that require high-capacity communications, such as virtual reality, high-definition video transmission, and vehicle-to-everything (V2X). Particularly in terms of V2X, the application of FR2 will have a profound impact on sidelink (SL) communications, providing key support for the realization of vehicle platforming, extended sensor, and automatic driving functions.
  • SL's PC5 interface has many features that NR's Uu interface does not have, which has caused some technical problems.
  • the Uu port of the NR system has a beam failure detection (BFD) mechanism to be able to detect whether the beam fails and reduce service delay.
  • BFD beam failure detection
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and device for providing a beam failure detection mechanism in SL communication.
  • a first communication method includes: a first terminal device sends K2 first reference signals to a second terminal device in K1 directions, and each of the K1 directions is the The direction in which the first terminal device sends the data signal to the second terminal device, one of the K2 first reference signals is used to detect whether a beam in the direction where the one first reference signal is located fails, K1 and K2 are both positive integers, and K2 is greater than or equal to K1; the first terminal device determines that N1 consecutive times, the beams in the K1 directions have failed, and N1 is a positive integer; the first terminal device is P2 second reference signals are sent to the second terminal device in the P1 direction, and one second reference signal in the P2 second reference signals is used to measure the beam performance in the direction where the one first reference signal is located.
  • the P1 directions are part or all of the transmission directions supported by the first terminal device, P1 is a positive integer, and P2 is an integer greater than or equal to P1; the first terminal device receives data from the second terminal device.
  • the method may be executed by a first communication device, and the first communication device may be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the communication device to implement the functions required by the method, such as a chip.
  • the first communication device is a first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device is a terminal device, or a chip set in the terminal device for realizing the function of the terminal device, or other component used for realizing the function of the terminal device. In the following introduction process, it is assumed that the first communication device is the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device can send the first reference signal to the second terminal device, so that the first terminal device can determine whether the beam in the K1 direction has failed, which is equivalent to providing a method for beam communication in SL communication.
  • the mechanism of failure detection if the first terminal device determines that the beam in the K1 direction fails, the first terminal device may also send P2 second reference signals to the second terminal device in the P1 direction.
  • the K1 direction is the first The direction corresponding to the service beam of a terminal device, and the P1 directions are part of the transmission direction or all the transmission directions supported by the first terminal device, and the number of directions included in the P1 directions may be greater than the number of directions included in the K1 directions.
  • the first terminal device can continue to determine whether there are available beams in more directions (ie P1 directions), and there is a possibility that there are available beams in the P1 direction
  • the performance will be greater than the possibility of available beams in K1 directions, which increases the possibility of obtaining available beams.
  • the method further includes:
  • the first terminal device sends a second message to the second terminal device, where the second message is used to indicate available beams among the P1 beams, or indicate that none of the P1 beams are available; or,
  • the first terminal device may send a second message to the second terminal device.
  • the second message is used to indicate the available beams in the P1 beams, or indicate that none of the P1 beams are available.
  • the second terminal device may determine which beams are available in the P1 beams according to the second message, or if the second message indicates P1 If none of the beams are available, the second terminal device can determine that all P1 beams are unavailable according to the second message. If the second message indicates the beams available in P1 beams, one way is that the second message includes the identifiers of the beams available in P1 beams.
  • the beam identifiers are, for example, the ID of the beam or the number of the beam.
  • the second terminal device According to the identifiers of the beams included in the second message, it can be determined that the beams corresponding to these identifiers are available beams.
  • the second message makes the instructions clearer.
  • the first terminal device may send a second message to the second terminal device, the second message is used to indicate the beams available in the P1 beams .
  • the second terminal device may determine which beams of the P1 beams are available according to the second message. If there are no available beams in the P1 beams, the first terminal device may not send the second message to the second terminal device. If the second terminal device does not receive the second message from the first terminal device, it can be determined that none of the P1 beams are available. In this way, the number of messages sent by the first terminal device can be reduced, and signaling overhead can be saved.
  • the method further includes:
  • the first terminal device recovers one or more of the P1 beams through the RRC layer of the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device can inform the upper layer of the first terminal device that the upper layer of the first terminal device can perform beam recovery.
  • the second terminal device determines that none of the P1 beams are available, the second terminal device can inform the upper layer of the second terminal device that the upper layer of the second terminal device can perform beam recovery.
  • the upper layer of the second terminal device may cooperate with the upper layer of the first terminal device to perform beam recovery. Equivalently, if the beam cannot be recovered through the P2 second reference signal, it can also be recovered through a higher layer, so that the beam recovery scheme is more reliable.
  • the first terminal device determines that all beams in the K1 directions fail N1 consecutive times, including:
  • the first terminal device determines that the beams in the K1 directions have failed for N1 consecutive times.
  • the second terminal device may measure the K2 first reference signals, and determine whether the K1 beams have failed according to the measurement result. If it is determined that the beams in K1 directions have failed for N1 consecutive times, the second terminal device may send BFRR to the first terminal device, and the first terminal device may receive the BFRR from the second terminal device.
  • the BFRR may indicate consecutive N1 times, K1 All beams in the direction failed. As long as the first terminal device receives the BFRR, it can be determined that the beams in the K1 directions have failed for N1 consecutive times. Through BFRR, it can be determined whether the beams in the K1 directions have failed for N1 consecutive times, and there is no need to introduce other messages, which is easier to be compatible with the existing technical solutions.
  • the second terminal device may measure the K2 first reference signals to obtain the measurement result.
  • the second terminal device may send the first message to the first terminal device, and the first message may be Indicate the measurement results of the K2 first reference signals by the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device receives the first message from the second terminal device, and can obtain the measurement results of K2 first reference signals. According to the measurement result, the first terminal device can determine whether the beams in the K1 directions have failed N1 consecutive times.
  • the first message sent by the second terminal device to the first terminal device may not include the measurement results of the K2 first reference signals, but may include the first indication information, which may indicate that the K1 beams are Available beams, or indicate that K1 beams are not available.
  • the first terminal device receives the first message from the second terminal device, and can determine the available beams among the K1 beams, or determine that none of the K1 beams are available. In this manner, the first terminal device and the second terminal device do not need to interact with BFRR, which reduces the steps of the beam detection process and further improves the efficiency of beam recovery.
  • the method further includes:
  • the first terminal device sends M2 third reference signals to the second terminal device in M1 directions, and one third reference signal in the M2 third reference signals is used to detect the one third reference Whether the beam in the direction of the signal can be used to restore the communication connection, M1 is a positive integer, and M2 is an integer greater than or equal to M1;
  • the first terminal device determines that for N2 consecutive times, none of the beams in the M1 directions can be used to restore the communication connection, and N2 is a positive integer.
  • the M1 directions may correspond to M1 beams, or corresponding to M1 transmit beams.
  • the M1 beams may be candidate beams of the first terminal device.
  • the M1 beams are all candidate beams of the first terminal device, or part of the candidate beams of the first terminal device. That is to say, if the first terminal device determines that the beams in the K1 directions have failed, it may further send the third reference signal through the candidate beam to determine whether the communication connection can be restored through the beams in the M1 direction. If the communication connection can be restored through the beams in the M1 direction, the first terminal device may not need to send P2 second reference signals. However, if the communication connection cannot be restored through the beams in the M1 direction, the first terminal device may send P2 second reference signals again. It is equivalent to that if the communication connection cannot be restored after trying various methods, the method provided in the embodiment of the present application can be used to send P2 second reference signals. In this way, the solution of the embodiment of the present application can be compatible with the existing technology.
  • the first terminal device determines that all beams in the K1 directions fail for N1 consecutive times, and determines that all beams in the M1 directions fail for N2 consecutive times.
  • Used to restore communication connections including:
  • the first terminal device receives the BFRR from the second terminal device, the BFRR indicates that N1 consecutive times, the beams in the K1 directions have failed, and N2 consecutive times, the beams in the M1 directions have all failed. It cannot be used to restore communication connections.
  • the second terminal device can report to the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device can receive the BFRR from the second terminal device.
  • the BFRR can indicate that the beams in the K1 directions have failed for N1 consecutive times, and that the beams in the M1 directions can not be used to restore the communication connection for N2 consecutive times.
  • the first terminal device receives the BFRR, it can determine that the beams in the K1 directions have failed for N1 consecutive times, and it can be determined that the beams in the M1 directions cannot be used to restore the communication connection for N2 consecutive times.
  • the second terminal device only needs to send BFRR to the first terminal device to indicate a variety of information, which helps to reduce the number of messages sent by the second terminal device to the first terminal device and save signaling Overhead. And through BFRR indicating a variety of information, the utilization rate of BFRR can also be improved.
  • the method further includes:
  • the first terminal device sends a second response message to the second terminal device, and the second response message is a response message of the BFRR.
  • the first terminal device may send a BFRR response message to the second terminal device, so that the second terminal device knows that the first terminal device has received the BFRR. This makes the communication process between the first terminal device and the second terminal device more reliable.
  • a second communication method includes: a second terminal device receives K2 first reference signals in K1 directions corresponding to the first terminal device, and each of the K1 directions is The direction in which the first terminal device sends the data signal to the second terminal device, and one of the K2 first reference signals is used to detect whether the beam in the direction where the one first reference signal is located Failure, K1 is a positive integer, K2 is an integer greater than or equal to K1; the second terminal device sends a first message or BFRR to the first terminal device, and the first message is used to instruct the second terminal device For the measurement results of the K2 first reference signals, the BFRR is used to indicate that N1 consecutive times, the beams in the K1 directions have failed; the second terminal device receives the corresponding data from the first terminal device P2 second reference signals in the P1 direction, one of the P2 second reference signals is used to measure the beam quality in the direction where the one second reference signal is located, the P1 direction Are all or part of the transmission directions supported by
  • the method may be executed by a second communication device, and the second communication device may be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the communication device to implement the functions required by the method, such as a chip.
  • the second communication device is a second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device is a terminal device, or a chip set in the terminal device for realizing the function of the terminal device, or other component used for realizing the function of the terminal device. In the following introduction process, it is taken as an example that the second communication device is the second terminal device.
  • the method further includes:
  • the second terminal device receives a second message from the first terminal device, the second message is used to indicate the available beams among the P1 beams, or indicate that none of the P1 beams are available; or,
  • the second terminal device does not receive the second message from the first terminal device, and the second terminal device determines that none of the P1 beams are available.
  • the method further includes:
  • the second terminal device recovers one or more of the P1 beams through the RRC layer of the second terminal device.
  • the method further includes:
  • the second terminal device receives M2 third reference signals from the first terminal device in M1 directions, and the third reference signal is used to detect whether the beam in the corresponding direction can be used to restore the communication connection, M1 is a positive integer, and M2 is an integer greater than or equal to M1.
  • the method further includes:
  • the second terminal device sends a fourth message or the BFRR to the first terminal device, where the fourth message is used to indicate the measurement result of the second terminal device on the M2 third reference signals, so
  • the BFRR is also used to indicate that for N2 consecutive times, none of the beams in the M1 directions can be used to restore the communication connection.
  • a third communication method includes: a first terminal device sends K2 first reference signals to a second terminal device in K1 transmission directions, and each of the K1 directions is all directions.
  • the direction in which the first terminal device sends the data signal to the second terminal device, and one of the K2 first reference signals is used to detect the beam in the sending direction where the one first reference signal is located Whether it fails, K1 and K2 are both positive integers, K2 is greater than or equal to K1;
  • the first terminal device receives P2 second reference signals from the second terminal device in P3 receiving directions, and the P3 receives
  • the direction corresponds to the P1 sending directions of the first terminal device, and a second reference signal in the P2 second reference signals is used to measure the receiving direction of the first terminal device where the one second reference signal is located
  • the quality of the beam in the receiving direction of the first terminal device corresponds to the quality of the beam in a transmission direction of the first terminal device, and the P1 transmission directions are supported by the first terminal device Part of the transmission direction or
  • the method may be executed by a third communication device, and the third communication device may be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the communication device to implement the functions required by the method, such as a chip.
  • the third communication device is a first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device is a terminal device, or a chip set in the terminal device for realizing the function of the terminal device, or other component used for realizing the function of the terminal device.
  • the third communication device is the first terminal device as an example.
  • the first terminal device can send the first reference signal to the second terminal device, so that the first terminal device can determine whether the beams in the K1 transmission directions have failed, which is equivalent to providing a method in SL communication
  • the mechanism for beam failure detection if the second terminal device determines that the beam in the K1 transmission direction fails, the second terminal device can also send P2 second reference signals to the first terminal device, and the first terminal device receives the second reference signal from the first terminal device in the P3 reception direction.
  • the P2 second reference signal of the second terminal device can be understood as that the K1 transmission direction is the direction corresponding to the service beam of the first terminal device, and the P3 reception direction is a part or part of all the reception directions supported by the first terminal device. All.
  • Each beam correspondence includes a sending beam and a receiving beam.
  • the sending beam and the receiving beam indicated by each beam correspondence have a one-to-one correspondence. Therefore, the P3 receiving beams may correspond to the P1 transmitting beams of the first terminal device. Then, the P3 receiving directions correspond to the P1 transmitting directions of the first terminal device.
  • the number of directions included in the P1 transmission directions may be greater than the number of directions included in the K1 transmission directions, that is, if the beams in the K1 transmission directions fail, the first terminal device may continue to determine more Whether there is an available beam in the direction (ie, P1 transmission direction), and the possibility of an available beam in the P1 transmission direction is greater than the possibility of an available beam in the K1 transmission direction, which improves the possibility of obtaining an available beam. In this way, try to determine the available beams through the physical layer, or restore the beams through the physical layer, without using higher layers to restore the beams, which improves the efficiency of beam recovery and reduces the service delay caused by beam failure. .
  • the method further includes:
  • the first terminal device sends a first response message to the second terminal device, where the first response message is used to indicate available beams in the P1 beams, or used to indicate that none of the P1 beams are available ;or,
  • the first terminal device determines that none of the P1 beams are available, and the first terminal device does not send a first response message to the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device may send a first response message to the second terminal device.
  • the first response message is used to indicate available beams among the P1 beams, or indicate that none of the P1 beams are available.
  • the second terminal device receives the first response message, if the first response message indicates the beams available in the P1 beams, the second terminal device can determine which beams are available in the P1 beams according to the first response message, or if the first response message
  • the response message indicates that all P1 beams are unavailable, and the second terminal device can determine that all P1 beams are unavailable according to the first response message.
  • the indication through the first response message can make the indication clearer.
  • the first terminal device may send a first response message to the second terminal device, and the first response message is used to indicate that the P1 beams are available Beam.
  • the second terminal device can determine which beams of the P1 beams are available according to the first response message. If there are no available beams in the P1 beams, the first terminal device may not send the first response message to the second terminal device. If the second terminal device does not receive the first response message from the first terminal device, it can be determined that none of the P1 beams are available. In this way, the number of messages sent by the first terminal device to the second terminal device can be reduced, and signaling overhead can be saved.
  • the method further includes:
  • the first terminal device sends M2 third reference signals to the second terminal device in M1 transmission directions, and one third reference signal in the M2 third reference signals is used to detect the one third reference signal. Whether the beam in the sending direction where the reference signal is located can be used to restore the communication connection, M1 is a positive integer, and M2 is an integer greater than or equal to M1.
  • the M1 directions may correspond to M1 beams, or corresponding to M1 transmit beams.
  • the M1 beams may be candidate beams of the first terminal device.
  • the M1 beams are all candidate beams of the first terminal device, or part of the candidate beams of the first terminal device. That is to say, if the first terminal device determines that the beams in the K1 directions have failed, it may further send the third reference signal through the candidate beam to determine whether the communication connection can be restored through the beams in the M1 direction. If the communication connection can be restored through the beams in the M1 direction, the first terminal device may not need to send P2 second reference signals. However, if the communication connection cannot be restored through the beams in the M1 direction, the first terminal device may send P2 second reference signals again. It is equivalent to that if the communication connection cannot be restored after trying various methods, the method provided in the embodiment of the present application can be used to send P2 second reference signals. In this way, the solution of the embodiment of the present application can be compatible with the existing technology.
  • the method further includes:
  • the first terminal device recovers one or more of the P1 beams through the RRC layer of the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device can inform the upper layer of the first terminal device that the upper layer of the first terminal device can perform beam recovery.
  • the second terminal device determines that none of the P1 beams are available, the second terminal device can inform the upper layer of the second terminal device that the upper layer of the second terminal device can perform beam recovery.
  • the upper layer of the second terminal device may cooperate with the upper layer of the first terminal device to perform beam recovery. Equivalently, if the beam cannot be recovered through the P2 second reference signal, it can also be recovered through a higher layer, so that the beam recovery scheme is more reliable.
  • a fourth communication method includes: a second terminal device receives K2 first reference signals in K1 transmission directions corresponding to the first terminal device, each of the K1 directions Is the direction in which the first terminal device sends the data signal to the second terminal device, and one of the K2 first reference signals is used to detect the direction in which the one first reference signal is located K1 is a positive integer, and K2 is an integer greater than or equal to K1; the second terminal device determines that N1 consecutive times, the beams in the K1 transmission directions have failed, and N1 is a positive integer; The second terminal device sends P2 second reference signals to the first terminal device, the P2 reference signals correspond to the P1 transmission directions of the first terminal device, and the P1 transmission directions are the first Part of the transmission direction or all transmission directions supported by the terminal device, one of the second reference signals in the P2 second reference signals is used to measure the beam beam in the receiving direction of the first terminal device where the one second reference signal is located Quality, the quality of the beam in the receiving
  • the method may be executed by a fourth communication device, and the fourth communication device may be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the communication device to implement the functions required by the method, such as a chip.
  • the fourth communication device is a second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device is a terminal device, or a chip set in the terminal device for realizing the function of the terminal device, or other component used for realizing the function of the terminal device.
  • the fourth communication device is the second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device determining whether the P1 beams corresponding to the P1 transmission directions are available according to the P2 second reference signals includes:
  • the second terminal device receives a first response message from the first terminal device, where the first response message is used to indicate available beams in the P1 beams, or used to indicate that none of the P1 beams is available Use; or,
  • the second terminal device does not receive the first response message from the first terminal device, and the second terminal device determines that none of the P1 beams are available.
  • the method further includes:
  • the second terminal device receives M2 third reference signals in the M1 transmission directions corresponding to the first terminal device, and one third reference signal in the M2 third reference signals is used to detect the one Whether the beam in the transmission direction where the third reference signal is located can be used to restore the communication connection, M1 is a positive integer, and M2 is an integer greater than or equal to M1;
  • the second terminal device determines that N2 consecutive times, none of the beams in the M1 transmission directions can be used to restore the communication connection, and N2 is a positive integer.
  • the method further includes:
  • the second terminal device recovers one or more of the P1 beams through the RRC layer of the second terminal device.
  • a communication device is provided, for example, the communication device is the first communication device as described above.
  • the first communication device is used to execute the method in the foregoing first aspect or any possible implementation manner.
  • the first communication device may include a module for executing the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner, for example, including a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the transceiver module may include a sending module and a receiving module.
  • the sending module and the receiving module may be different functional modules, or may also be the same functional module, but can implement different functions.
  • the first communication device is a first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the first communication device is the first terminal device.
  • the transceiver module may also be implemented by a transceiver, and the processing module may also be implemented by a processor.
  • the sending module may be implemented by a transmitter, and the receiving module may be implemented by a receiver.
  • the transmitter and the receiver may be different functional modules, or may be the same functional module, but can implement different functions.
  • the transceiver is realized by, for example, an antenna, a feeder, and a codec in the communication device.
  • the transceiver (or transmitter and receiver) is, for example, a communication interface in the chip, and the communication interface is connected to the radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components.
  • the introduction continues with the first communication device being the first terminal device, and the processing module and the transceiver module as examples. among them,
  • the transceiver module is configured to send K2 first reference signals to the second terminal device in K1 directions, each of the K1 directions is that the first terminal device sends to the second terminal device
  • the direction of the data signal one of the K2 first reference signals is used to detect whether the beam in the direction of the one first reference signal fails, K1 and K2 are both positive integers, and K2 is greater than or Equal to K1;
  • the processing module is configured to determine that, N1 consecutive times, the beams in the K1 directions have failed, and N1 is a positive integer;
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send P2 second reference signals to the second terminal device in the P1 direction, and one second reference signal in the P2 second reference signals is used to measure the first The quality of the beam in the direction where the reference signal is located, the P1 directions are part of the transmission direction or all the transmission directions supported by the first terminal device, P1 is a positive integer, and P2 is an integer greater than or equal to P1;
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive the measurement result of the P2 second reference signals from the second terminal device;
  • the processing module is further configured to determine whether the P1 beams corresponding to the P1 directions are available according to the measurement results of the P2 second reference signals.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send a second message to the second terminal device, the second message being used to indicate available beams in the P1 beams, or indicate that none of the P1 beams are available; or ,
  • the processing module is further configured to control the transceiver module not to send a second message to the second terminal device when it is determined that none of the P1 beams are available.
  • the processing module is further configured to recover one or more of the P1 beams through the RRC layer of the first terminal device.
  • the processing module is used to determine in the following manner that all beams in the K1 directions fail for N1 consecutive times:
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send M2 third reference signals to the second terminal device in M1 directions, and one third reference signal in the M2 third reference signals is used to detect the first 3. Whether the beam in the direction of the reference signal can be used to restore the communication connection, M1 is a positive integer, and M2 is an integer greater than or equal to M1;
  • the processing module is also used to determine that, for N2 consecutive times, none of the beams in the M1 directions can be used to restore the communication connection, and N2 is a positive integer.
  • the processing module is configured to determine that the beams in the K1 directions have failed for N1 consecutive times, and determine that the beams in the M1 directions have failed consecutively N2 times. None of the beams can be used to restore the communication connection:
  • the BFRR indicates that N1 consecutive times, the beams in the K1 directions have failed, and N2 consecutive times, the beams in the M1 directions are not available It is used to restore the communication connection.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send a second response message to the second terminal device, where the second response message is a response message of the BFRR.
  • a communication device is provided, for example, the communication device is the second communication device as described above.
  • the second communication device is used to execute the method in the foregoing second aspect or any possible implementation manner.
  • the second communication device may include a module for executing the method in the second aspect or any possible implementation manner, for example, including a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the transceiver module may include a sending module and a receiving module.
  • the sending module and the receiving module may be different functional modules, or may also be the same functional module, but can implement different functions.
  • the second communication device is a second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the second communication device is the second terminal device.
  • the transceiver module may also be implemented by a transceiver, and the processing module may also be implemented by a processor.
  • the sending module may be implemented by a transmitter, and the receiving module may be implemented by a receiver.
  • the transmitter and the receiver may be different functional modules, or may be the same functional module, but can implement different functions.
  • the transceiver is realized by, for example, an antenna, a feeder, and a codec in the communication device.
  • the transceiver (or transmitter and receiver) is, for example, a communication interface in the chip, and the communication interface is connected to a radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components.
  • the second communication device is continued to be the second terminal device, and the processing module and the transceiver module are used as examples for the introduction. among them,
  • the transceiver module is configured to receive K2 first reference signals in K1 directions corresponding to the first terminal device, each of the K1 directions is the direction from the first terminal device to the second terminal The direction in which the device sends the data signal, one of the K2 first reference signals is used to detect whether the beam in the direction of the one first reference signal fails, K1 is a positive integer, and K2 is greater than or equal to K1 integer;
  • the second terminal device sends a first message or BFRR to the first terminal device, where the first message is used to indicate the measurement result of the K2 first reference signals by the second terminal device, and the BFRR It is used to indicate that the beams in the K1 directions have failed for N1 consecutive times;
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive P2 second reference signals in the P1 direction corresponding to the first terminal device, and one of the P2 second reference signals is used to measure the The quality of the beam in the direction of a second reference signal, the P1 directions are all or part of the transmission directions supported by the first terminal device, P1 is a positive integer, and P2 is an integer greater than or equal to P1;
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send the measurement results of the P2 second reference signals to the first terminal device, and the measurement results of the P2 second reference signals are used to determine whether there are any of the P1 beams. Available beams.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive a second message from the first terminal device, the second message being used to indicate available beams in the P1 beams, or indicate that none of the P1 beams are available; or,
  • the processing module is further configured to determine that none of the P1 beams are available when it is determined that the transceiver module has not received the second message from the first terminal device.
  • the processing module is further configured to recover one or more of the P1 beams through the RRC layer of the second terminal device.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive M2 third reference signals from the first terminal device in M1 directions, and the third reference signals are used to detect corresponding directions. Whether the above beam can be used to restore the communication connection, M1 is a positive integer, and M2 is an integer greater than or equal to M1.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send a fourth message or the BFRR to the first terminal device, and the fourth message is used to instruct the second terminal device to
  • the BFRR is also used to indicate that for N2 consecutive times, none of the beams in the M1 directions can be used to restore the communication connection.
  • a communication device is provided, for example, the communication device is the aforementioned third communication device.
  • the third communication device is used to execute the method in the foregoing third aspect or any possible implementation manner.
  • the third communication device may include a module for executing the method in the third aspect or any possible implementation manner, for example, including a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the transceiver module may include a sending module and a receiving module.
  • the sending module and the receiving module may be different functional modules, or may also be the same functional module, but can implement different functions.
  • the third communication device is a first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the third communication device is the first terminal device.
  • the transceiver module may also be implemented by a transceiver, and the processing module may also be implemented by a processor.
  • the sending module may be implemented by a transmitter, and the receiving module may be implemented by a receiver.
  • the transmitter and the receiver may be different functional modules, or may be the same functional module, but can implement different functions.
  • the transceiver is realized by, for example, an antenna, a feeder, and a codec in the communication device.
  • the transceiver (or transmitter and receiver) is, for example, a communication interface in the chip, and the communication interface is connected to the radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components.
  • the third communication device is continued to be the first terminal device, and the processing module and the transceiver module are used as examples for the introduction. among them,
  • the transceiver module is configured to send K2 first reference signals to the second terminal device in K1 transmission directions, each of the K1 directions is the direction from the first terminal device to the second terminal device The direction in which the data signal is sent, one of the K2 first reference signals is used to detect whether the beam in the sending direction where the one first reference signal is located fails, K1 and K2 are both positive integers, and K2 Greater than or equal to K1;
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive P2 second reference signals from the second terminal device in P3 receiving directions, where the P3 receiving directions correspond to the P1 sending directions of the first terminal device, One second reference signal in the P2 second reference signals is used to measure the beam quality in the receiving direction of the first terminal device where the one second reference signal is located.
  • the quality of the beam corresponds to the quality of the beam in one transmission direction of the first terminal device, the P1 transmission directions are part of the transmission directions or all the transmission directions supported by the first terminal device, P1 is a positive integer, and P2 is An integer greater than or equal to P3;
  • the processing module is configured to measure the P2 second reference signals
  • the processing module is further configured to determine whether the P1 beams corresponding to the P1 transmission directions are available according to the measurement results of the P2 second reference signals.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send a first response message to the second terminal device, where the first response message is used to indicate the beams available in the P1 beams, or to indicate that the P1 beams are equal to each other. Not available; or,
  • the processing module is further configured to control the transceiver module not to send the first response message to the second terminal device when it is determined that none of the P1 beams are available.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send M2 third reference signals to the second terminal device in M1 transmission directions, one of the M2 third reference signals
  • the third reference signal is used to detect whether the beam in the transmission direction where the third reference signal is located can be used to restore the communication connection
  • M1 is a positive integer
  • M2 is an integer greater than or equal to M1.
  • the processing module is further configured to recover one or more of the P1 beams through the RRC layer of the first terminal device.
  • a communication device is provided, for example, the communication device is the fourth communication device as described above.
  • the fourth communication device is configured to execute the method in the foregoing fourth aspect or any possible implementation manner.
  • the fourth communication device may include a module for executing the method in the fourth aspect or any possible implementation manner, for example, including a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the transceiver module may include a sending module and a receiving module.
  • the sending module and the receiving module may be different functional modules, or may also be the same functional module, but can implement different functions.
  • the fourth communication device is a second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the fourth communication device is the second terminal device.
  • the transceiver module may also be implemented by a transceiver, and the processing module may also be implemented by a processor.
  • the sending module may be implemented by a transmitter, and the receiving module may be implemented by a receiver.
  • the transmitter and the receiver may be different functional modules, or the same functional module, but capable of implementing different functions.
  • the transceiver is realized by, for example, an antenna, a feeder, and a codec in the communication device.
  • the transceiver (or transmitter and receiver) is, for example, a communication interface in the chip, and the communication interface is connected to the radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components.
  • the fourth communication device is continued to be the second terminal device, and the processing module and the transceiver module are used as examples for the introduction. among them,
  • the processing module is configured to determine that, N1 consecutive times, the beams in the K1 transmission directions have failed, and N1 is a positive integer;
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send P2 second reference signals to the first terminal device, where the P2 reference signals correspond to P1 transmission directions of the first terminal device, and the P1 transmission directions are Part of the transmission direction or all transmission directions supported by the first terminal device, and one second reference signal in the P2 second reference signals is used to measure the reception direction of the first terminal device where the one second reference signal is located
  • the quality of the beam in the receiving direction of the first terminal device corresponds to the quality of the beam in a transmission direction of the first terminal device, P1 is a positive integer, and P2 is an integer greater than or equal to P3;
  • the processing module is further configured to determine whether the P1 beams corresponding to the P1 transmission directions are available according to the P2 second reference signals.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive M2 third reference signals in M1 transmission directions corresponding to the first terminal device, and one third reference signal of the M2 third reference signals is used for detecting Whether the beam in the sending direction where the third reference signal is located can be used to restore the communication connection, M1 is a positive integer, and M2 is an integer greater than or equal to M1;
  • the processing module is also used to determine that, for N2 consecutive times, none of the beams in the M1 transmission directions can be used to restore the communication connection, and N2 is a positive integer.
  • the processing module is further configured to recover one or more of the P1 beams through the RRC layer of the second terminal device.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the communication device is, for example, the first communication device as described above.
  • the communication device includes a processor.
  • it may also include a memory for storing computer instructions.
  • the processor and the memory are coupled to each other, and are used to implement the methods described in the first aspect or various possible implementation manners.
  • the first communication device may not include a memory, and the memory may be located outside the first communication device.
  • the first communication device may further include a communication interface for communicating with other devices or equipment.
  • the processor, the memory, and the communication interface are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the methods described in the first aspect or various possible implementation manners.
  • the first communication device when the processor executes the computer instructions stored in the memory, the first communication device is caused to execute the method in the foregoing first aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners.
  • the first communication device is a first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the communication interface is realized by a transceiver (or a transmitter and a receiver) in the communication device, for example, the transceiver is realized by an antenna, a feeder and a receiver in the communication device. Codec and other implementations.
  • the communication interface is, for example, an input/output interface of the chip, such as input/output pins, etc., and the communication interface is connected to the radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the communication device is, for example, the second communication device as described above.
  • the communication device includes a processor.
  • it may also include a memory for storing computer instructions.
  • the processor and the memory are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the methods described in the second aspect or various possible implementation manners.
  • the second communication device may not include a memory, and the memory may be located outside the second communication device.
  • the second communication device may further include a communication interface for communicating with other devices or equipment.
  • the processor, the memory, and the communication interface are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the methods described in the second aspect or various possible implementation manners.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the communication device is, for example, the third communication device as described above.
  • the communication device includes a processor.
  • it may also include a memory for storing computer instructions.
  • the processor and the memory are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the methods described in the third aspect or various possible implementation manners.
  • the third communication device may not include a memory, and the memory may be located outside the third communication device.
  • the third communication device may further include a communication interface for communicating with other devices or equipment.
  • the processor, the memory, and the communication interface are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the methods described in the third aspect or various possible implementation manners.
  • the third communication device is caused to execute the method in the third aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners.
  • the third communication device is a first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the communication interface is realized by a transceiver (or a transmitter and a receiver) in the communication device, for example, for example, the transceiver is realized by an antenna, a feeder and a receiver in the communication device. Codec and other implementations.
  • the communication interface is, for example, an input/output interface of the chip, such as an input/output pin, etc., and the communication interface is connected to a radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the communication device is, for example, the fourth communication device as described above.
  • the communication device includes a processor.
  • it may also include a memory for storing computer instructions.
  • the processor and the memory are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the methods described in the fourth aspect or various possible implementation manners.
  • the fourth communication device may not include a memory, and the memory may be located outside the fourth communication device.
  • the fourth communication device may further include a communication interface for communicating with other devices or equipment.
  • the processor, the memory, and the communication interface are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the methods described in the fourth aspect or various possible implementation manners.
  • the second communication device when the processor executes the computer instructions stored in the memory, the second communication device is caused to execute the method in the fourth aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners.
  • the fourth communication device is a second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the communication interface is realized by, for example, a transceiver (or a transmitter and a receiver) in the communication device, for example, the transceiver is realized by an antenna, a feeder and a receiver in the communication device. Codec and other implementations.
  • the fourth communication device is a chip set in a communication device, the communication interface is, for example, an input/output interface of the chip, such as an input/output pin, etc., and the communication interface is connected to a radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components.
  • a communication system which includes the communication device described in the fifth aspect or the communication device described in the ninth aspect, and the communication device described in the sixth aspect or the communication device described in the tenth aspect ⁇ Communication device.
  • a communication system which includes the communication device described in the seventh aspect or the communication device described in the eleventh aspect, and the communication device described in the eighth aspect or the twelfth aspect The communication device.
  • a computer-readable storage medium is provided, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are executed on a computer, the computer executes the first aspect or any one of the above. The method described in one possible implementation.
  • a computer-readable storage medium is provided, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store computer instructions, and when the computer instructions run on a computer, the computer executes the second aspect or any one of the above. The method described in one possible implementation.
  • a computer-readable storage medium is provided, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store computer instructions, and when the computer instructions run on a computer, the computer executes the third aspect or any one of the foregoing The methods described in the possible implementations.
  • a computer-readable storage medium is provided, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are executed on a computer, the computer executes the fourth aspect or any one of the foregoing. The method described in one possible implementation.
  • a computer program product containing instructions is provided.
  • the computer program product is used to store computer instructions.
  • the computer instructions run on a computer, the computer executes the first aspect or any one of the above. The method described in one possible implementation.
  • a computer program product containing instructions is provided.
  • the computer program product is used to store computer instructions.
  • the computer instructions When the computer instructions are run on a computer, the computer executes the second aspect or any one of the foregoing. The method described in one possible implementation.
  • a computer program product containing instructions is provided, the computer program product is used to store computer instructions, and when the computer instructions run on a computer, the computer executes the third aspect or any of the above The method described in one possible implementation.
  • a computer program product containing instructions is provided, the computer program product is used to store computer instructions, and when the computer instructions run on a computer, the computer executes the fourth aspect or any of the above The method described in one possible implementation.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a mechanism for beam failure detection in SL communication.
  • the embodiments of the present application can determine the available beams through the physical layer as much as possible, or restore the beams through the physical layer, without the need for higher layers to restore the beams, which improves the efficiency of beam recovery and reduces the business caused by beam failure. Time delay.
  • FIG 1 shows several schematic diagrams of V2X
  • Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the application
  • FIG. 3 is a flowchart of the first communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart of a second communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a third communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of a fourth communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic block diagram of a first terminal device of the first type according to an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic block diagram of a first type of second terminal device according to an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic block diagram of a second type of first terminal device according to an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic block diagram of a second type of second terminal device according to an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 12 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 13 is still another schematic block diagram of the communication device provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • Terminal devices may include devices that provide users with voice and/or data connectivity, specifically, include devices that provide users with voice, or include devices that provide users with data connectivity, or include devices that provide users with voice and data Connectivity equipment. For example, it may include a handheld device with a wireless connection function, or a processing device connected to a wireless modem.
  • the terminal device can communicate with the core network via a radio access network (RAN), exchange voice or data with the RAN, or exchange voice and data with the RAN.
  • RAN radio access network
  • it may include mobile phones (or “cellular” phones), computers with mobile terminal equipment, portable, pocket-sized, hand-held, mobile devices with built-in computers, and so on.
  • PCS personal communication service
  • PCS cordless phones
  • SIP session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDA personal digital assistants
  • restricted devices such as devices with low power consumption, or devices with limited storage capabilities, or devices with limited computing capabilities. Examples include barcodes, radio frequency identification (RFID), sensors, global positioning system (GPS), laser scanners and other information sensing equipment.
  • RFID radio frequency identification
  • GPS global positioning system
  • laser scanners and other information sensing equipment.
  • the terminal device may also be a wearable device.
  • Wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices or smart wearable devices, etc. It is a general term for using wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes Wait.
  • a wearable device is a portable device that is directly worn on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories. Wearable devices are not only a kind of hardware device, but also realize powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, complete or partial functions that can be achieved without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones.
  • Use such as all kinds of smart bracelets, smart helmets, smart jewelry, etc. for physical sign monitoring.
  • the various terminal devices described above if they are located on the vehicle (for example, placed in the vehicle or installed in the vehicle), can be regarded as vehicle-mounted terminal equipment, for example, the vehicle-mounted terminal equipment is also called on-board unit (OBU). ).
  • the terminal device of the embodiment of the present application may also be an on-board module, on-board module, on-board component, on-board chip, or on-board unit built into a vehicle as one or more components or units.
  • a group, a vehicle-mounted component, a vehicle-mounted chip, or a vehicle-mounted unit may implement the method of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the terminal device may also include a relay. Or it can be understood that everything that can communicate with the base station can be regarded as a terminal device.
  • the terminal device may be a terminal device or a module for realizing the functions of the terminal device.
  • the module may be set in the terminal device, or may also be set independently of the terminal device.
  • the module is, for example, a chip.
  • V2X specifically includes vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V), vehicle-to-infrastructure (V2I), vehicle-to-pedestrian (V2P) direct communication, and There are several application requirements such as vehicle-to-network (V2N) communication and interaction.
  • V2V refers to the communication between vehicles
  • V2P refers to the communication between vehicles and people (including pedestrians, cyclists, drivers, or passengers)
  • V2I refers to the communication between vehicles and network equipment, such as RSU
  • V2N refers to the communication between the vehicle and the base station/network.
  • V2P can be used as a safety warning for pedestrians or non-motorized vehicles on the road.
  • vehicles can communicate with roads and even other infrastructure, such as traffic lights, roadblocks, etc., to obtain road management information such as traffic light signal timing.
  • V2V can be used for information interaction and reminding between vehicles, and the most typical application is for the anti-collision safety system between vehicles.
  • V2N is currently the most widely used form of Internet of Vehicles. Its main function is to connect vehicles to a cloud server through a mobile network, and use the navigation, entertainment, or anti-theft application functions provided by the cloud server.
  • V2X it is mainly the communication between terminal equipment and terminal equipment.
  • the current standard protocols support broadcast, multicast, and unicast.
  • the broadcast mode means that the terminal device as the sender uses the broadcast mode to send data, and multiple terminal device ends can receive sidelink control information (SCI) or sidelink sharing from the sender Channel (sidelink shared channel, SSCH).
  • SCI sidelink control information
  • SSCH sidelink shared channel
  • the way to ensure that all terminal devices parse the control information from the sender is that the sender does not scramble the control information, or the sender uses a scrambling code known to all terminal devices to scramble the control information .
  • the multicast mode is similar to broadcast transmission.
  • the terminal equipment as the sender uses the broadcast mode for data transmission, and a group of terminal equipment can parse SCI or SSCH.
  • the unicast mode is that one terminal device sends data to another terminal device, and other terminal devices do not need or cannot parse the data.
  • Beam management is an important technology proposed by 5G NR for FR2. It refers to the process of acquiring and maintaining a beam set for transmission and reception between the 5G base station (next generation nodeB, gNB) and the UE. Beam management includes two important functions: beam training and beam failure recovery (BFR).
  • BFR refers to a process in which the UE detects a failure of the serving beam (serving beam) according to the BFD criteria configured by the gNB, and then attempts to replace the serving beam with an available candidate beam (candidate beam), so that the pair of transmit and receive beams becomes available again.
  • the serving beam refers to the beam used to transmit useful signals between the gNB and the UE.
  • the useful signals include data signals and reference signals for performing BFD.
  • Candidate beams refer to beams that do not transmit useful signals but transmit reference signals for quality measurement between the gNB and the UE.
  • the description is mainly based on detecting the beam between the terminal device and the terminal device as an example.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device described in the following should be replaced with devices in the corresponding scenes accordingly.
  • the first terminal device can be replaced with a base station, and the second terminal device can be a second terminal device; if it is for uplink beam detection, the first terminal device can be A terminal device may be the first terminal device, and the second terminal device may be replaced by a base station.
  • At least one means one or more, and “plurality” means two or more.
  • “And/or” describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an “or” relationship.
  • "The following at least one item (a)” or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or a plurality of items (a).
  • at least one item (a) of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, ab, ac, bc, or abc, where a, b, and c can be single or multiple .
  • first and second are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the order, timing, priority, or order of multiple objects. Importance.
  • first reference signal and the second reference signal are only for distinguishing different reference signals, and do not necessarily indicate the difference in content, priority, transmission order, or importance of the two reference signals.
  • the condition of BFD is: N consecutive times, all service beams of gNB are considered as failures.
  • N is indicated by the beam failure instance max count field in the radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) signaling.
  • the criterion for the serving beam to be considered as a failure is: the reference signal received power (reference signal received power, RSRP) corresponding to the reference signal received power (RSRP) corresponding to the hypothetical physical downlink control channel of the reference signal transmitted in the serving beam for detecting beam failure , PDCCH)
  • the block error rate (BLER) is higher than the given threshold. This threshold uses the default BLER threshold used in radio link monitoring (RLM) to declare out-of-sync (out-of-sync) .
  • 2New candidate beam identification means that the gNB sends reference signals in a series of candidate beams and helps the UE to select candidate beams from them as the new service beam to restore the connected transmit and receive beam pair.
  • the reference signal sent by the gNB in the candidate beam is, for example, the channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) or the synchronization signal block (SSB), etc.
  • the specific reference signal is contained in the RRC signaling
  • the candidate beam reference signal list (candidate beam RS list) field indicates.
  • the UE finds that the RSRP of the reference signal sent in the candidate beam is higher than the configured threshold, it considers that the corresponding candidate beam is available, that is, the candidate beam can be used as a new serving beam.
  • the threshold is indicated explicitly or implicitly by the RSRP threshold SSB (rsrp-threshold SSB) field in the RRC signaling.
  • the step 1 above can occur before the step 2, or the step 1 can occur after the step 2, or the step 1 and the step 2 can occur at the same time.
  • the UE sends a beam failure recovery request (BFRR) to the gNB, and the gNB receives the BFRR from the UE.
  • the UE mainly sends BFRR on a physical random access channel (PRACH), or can send BFRR in a scanning manner on a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH).
  • PRACH physical random access channel
  • PUCCH physical uplink control channel
  • the BFRR contains the information of the available candidate beams. If the UE does not recognize the available candidate beams, then the BFRR is not sent. If the UE does not send BFRR, the UE will notify the higher layers of the UE, indicating that the UE is in the beam failure state.
  • the gNB cannot receive the BFRR from the UE, and the gNB will also notify the higher layers of the gNB, indicating that the gNB is in a beam failure state.
  • the upper layer of the UE and the upper layer of the gNB can perform beam recovery.
  • the 4 UE monitors the response of gNB to BFRR. If the UE sends BFRR to the gNB, the UE can start a time window during which it monitors the gNB's response to the BFRR. If the response from the gNB is received within this time window, the UE determines that the BFR is successful. If the response from the gNB is not received within this time window, the UE can send BFRR again. When the BFRR is repeatedly sent for a certain number of times, the BFR is still not received. Upon the response from the gNB, the UE will notify the higher layers of the UE, indicating that the UE is in the beam failure state. The upper layer of the UE and the upper layer of the gNB can perform beam recovery.
  • the above is only the BFD and BFR methods of the NR Uu port, and there is no BFD method or BFR method in SL communication.
  • the gNB there may be multiple optional transmission beams, and the serving beam and the candidate beam are only part of the optional transmission beams.
  • the UE will hand the beam recovery process to the higher layer for processing.
  • the NR Uu interface there is a gNB node, and the gNB will continuously send the SSB. If the beam is restored by the higher layer, the higher layer can use the SSB as a reference signal for beam recovery.
  • the SSB is continuously sent, and the higher layer of the UE can obtain the SSB in a short time, thereby completing the beam recovery.
  • the side link there is no node that continuously sends reference signals. If the upper layer recovers the beam, the upper layer may not be able to obtain the reference signal for beam recovery for a long time, thus making the beam recovery efficiency more efficient. If it is low, beam recovery may not even be completed.
  • the first terminal device can send the first reference signal to the second terminal device, so that the first terminal device can determine whether the beam in the K1 direction fails, which is equivalent to providing a method for performing SL communication.
  • the mechanism of beam failure detection if the first terminal device determines that the beam in the K1 direction fails, the first terminal device may also send P2 second reference signals to the second terminal device in the P1 direction.
  • the K1 direction is the first The direction corresponding to the service beam of a terminal device, and the P1 directions are part of the transmission direction or all the transmission directions supported by the first terminal device, and the number of directions included in the P1 directions may be greater than the number of directions included in the K1 directions. That is to say, if the beams in the K1 directions fail, the first terminal device can continue to determine whether there are available beams in more directions (ie P1 directions), and there is a possibility that there are available beams in the P1 direction The performance will be greater than the possibility of available beams in K1 directions, which increases the possibility of obtaining available beams. In this way, try to determine the available beams through the physical layer, or restore the beams through the physical layer, without using higher layers to restore the beams, which improves the efficiency of beam recovery and reduces the service delay caused by beam failure. .
  • D2D scenarios which can be NR D2D scenarios or LTE D2D scenarios, etc.
  • V2X scenarios which can be NR V2X scenarios or LTE V2X scenarios, etc.
  • It is applied to other scenarios or other communication systems, for example, it can also be used for beam detection of the Uu interface of the LTE system or the NR system.
  • FIG. 2 is a network architecture applied in the embodiment of this application.
  • Figure 2 includes a network device and two terminal devices, namely terminal device 1 and terminal device 2, for example, terminal device 1 is the terminal device of the sending end, and terminal device 2 is the terminal device of the receiving end. Both of these two terminal devices may be connected to the network device, or the two terminal devices may only have the terminal device 1 connected to the network device, and the terminal device 2 may not be connected to the network device.
  • the two terminal devices can communicate through SL.
  • the terminal device 1 can send data to the terminal device 2 through a service beam, or can send a reference signal to the terminal device 2 through a candidate beam.
  • the number of terminal devices in FIG. 2 is just an example. In practical applications, a network device can provide services for multiple terminal devices.
  • the network device in FIG. 2 is, for example, an access network device, such as a base station.
  • the access network equipment corresponds to different equipment in different systems.
  • it can correspond to the eNB in the 4G system
  • the 5G system corresponds to the access network equipment in 5G, such as gNB, or it is the access network equipment in the subsequent evolved communication system.
  • Network access equipment can correspond to the eNB in the 4G system
  • the 5G system corresponds to the access network equipment in 5G, such as gNB, or it is the access network equipment in the subsequent evolved communication system.
  • Network access equipment such as a base station.
  • the terminal device in FIG. 2 is a vehicle-mounted terminal device or a car as an example, but the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application is not limited to this.
  • Beam-failure instance (beam-failure instance): The terminal device receives the reference signal quasi co-located (QCL) with the PDCCH from the base station (for example, gNB). The terminal device measures the RSRP of the reference signal, and if the hypothetical PDCCH BLER corresponding to the measured RSRP is higher than a given threshold, it is considered that a beam failure instance has occurred.
  • QCL quasi co-located
  • the essence of the definition of the beam failure instance is that when paying attention to communication quality, it is often concerned with whether the control signal in the control channel can be successfully transmitted to the receiving end. If none of the control signals can be received by the receiving end with a lower BLER, then the connection can be considered as a failure.
  • “Quasily co-located with PDCCH” means that the channel experienced by the above reference signal is the same as the channel experienced by the control signal. If the RSRP of the reference signal is very low, it will naturally lead to a low signal-to-noise ratio and a very high BLER. high. By converting the RSRP of the reference signal into a hypothetical BLER, and comparing it with a given threshold, the quality of the PDCCH can be judged.
  • the second terminal device receives the reference signal from the first terminal device that is quasi co-located with the physical sidelink control channel (PSCCH), and the second terminal device Measure the RSRP of the reference signal, and if the hypothetical PSCCH BLER corresponding to the measured RSRP is higher than a given threshold, it is considered that a beam failure instance has occurred.
  • PSCCH physical sidelink control channel
  • Beam failure If the number of consecutive occurrences of beam failure instances is greater than or equal to the given number of times, the beam is considered to be failed.
  • beam "available” is also involved in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • one beam for example, a transmission beam
  • the beam can be used to send a data signal to the second terminal device.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a first communication method. Please refer to FIG. 3, which is a flowchart of this method.
  • the application of this method to the network architecture shown in FIG. 2 is taken as an example.
  • the method can be executed by two communication devices, for example, the first communication device and the second communication device.
  • the first communication device or the second communication device may be a network device or a communication device capable of supporting the network device to implement the functions required by the method, or may be a terminal device or a terminal device capable of supporting the functions required by the terminal device to implement the method.
  • the communication device may also be other communication devices, such as a chip. And there are no restrictions on the implementation of the first communication device or the second communication device.
  • the two communication devices can be implemented in the same form, for example, both can be implemented in the form of equipment, or the two communication devices can also be implemented as Different forms, for example, the first communication device is implemented in the form of a device, the second communication device is implemented in the form of a chip, and so on.
  • the network device is, for example, a base station.
  • the method executed by the terminal device and the terminal device is taken as an example, that is, the first communication device is a terminal device (for example, referred to as the first terminal device), and the second communication device is also a terminal device ( For example, it is called the second terminal device) as an example.
  • the first terminal device described below can implement the functions of the terminal device 1 in the network architecture shown in FIG.
  • the second terminal device may implement the functions of the terminal device 2 in the network architecture shown in FIG. 2.
  • the first terminal device sends K2 first reference signals to the second terminal device in the K1 direction, and the second terminal device receives the K2 first reference signals sent by the first terminal device in the K1 direction, or in other words, The second terminal device receives K2 first reference signals in K1 directions corresponding to the first terminal device.
  • the K1 directions corresponding to the first terminal device refer to the K1 transmission directions of the first terminal device. Therefore, the K2 first reference signals are sent by the first terminal device to the second terminal device and are sent through the K1 directions .
  • the K1 directions are all the transmission directions of the first terminal device. Therefore, the K1 directions may also be referred to as K1 transmission directions.
  • K1 is a positive integer
  • K2 may be an integer greater than or equal to K1, that is, in one of the K1 directions, one or more first reference signals may be sent.
  • the K1 directions may correspond to K1 beams, or corresponding to K1 transmission beams, and one of the K2 first reference signals may be used to detect whether the beam in the corresponding direction fails.
  • the so-called "corresponding direction” may refer to the direction in which the first reference signal is located, or refer to the sending direction of the first reference signal, or refer to the first reference signal The direction in which the beam is pointing.
  • the first reference signal is, for example, CSI-RS or SSB.
  • the so-called “beam in the corresponding direction” refers to the beam used to transmit the first reference signal.
  • the first reference signal 1 in the K2 first reference signals is sent in the direction 1 of the K1 directions, then the beam in the direction corresponding to the first reference signal 1 refers to the beam in the direction 1.
  • the K1 beams may be the serving beams of the first terminal device.
  • each beam of the K1 beams may be used to send a data signal to the second terminal device.
  • the K1 beams are all service beams of the first terminal device, or part of the service beams of the first terminal device.
  • each of the K1 directions may be the direction in which the first terminal device sends the data signal to the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device determines that all beams in the K1 directions fail for N1 consecutive times.
  • N1 is a positive integer.
  • N1 can be configured by a network device, or can be configured by a first terminal device, or configured by a second terminal device, or can also be specified by a protocol.
  • the beams in the K1 directions all fail may mean that the beams in the K1 directions all have beam failure instances.
  • the beam failure example here may mean that the hypothetical PSCCH BLER corresponding to the RSRP of the PSCCH quasi-co-located reference signal is higher than a given threshold, or the RSRP of the reference signal quasi-co-located with the PSCCH is lower than the given threshold.
  • Set threshold the hypothetical PSCCH BLER corresponding to the RSRP of the PSCCH quasi-co-located reference signal is higher than a given threshold, or the RSRP of the reference signal quasi-co-located with the PSCCH is lower than the given threshold.
  • the BFD condition may include only this one, or may also include other conditions.
  • the second terminal device can measure the K2 first reference signals after receiving the K2 first reference signals, and according to the measurement As a result, it is determined whether K1 beams have failed.
  • the measurement result is RSRP
  • the second terminal device considers that the beam has failed.
  • the first threshold is, for example, equal to the threshold in the BFD condition in step 1 as described above, or the first threshold may be configured by the network device, or may be configured by the first terminal device, or configured by the second terminal device, or also It can be stipulated by agreement.
  • the second terminal device may send BFRR to the first terminal device, and the first terminal device may receive the BFRR from the second terminal device.
  • the BFRR may indicate consecutive N1 times, K1 All beams in the direction failed. As long as the first terminal device receives the BFRR, it can be determined that the beams in the K1 directions have failed for N1 consecutive times.
  • the second terminal device may send the BFRR to the network device, and the network device may forward the BFRR to the network device after receiving the BFRR The first terminal device.
  • the second terminal device may carry the BFRR on a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) or a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) and send it to the network device.
  • the second terminal device can directly send the BFRR to the first terminal device without transferring through the network device, which can reduce the time delay.
  • PUCCH physical uplink control channel
  • PUSCH physical uplink shared channel
  • the second terminal device may directly send the BFRR to the first terminal device, or the second terminal device may send the BFRR to the second terminal device
  • the network device where the second terminal device is located forwards the BFRR to the network device where the first terminal device is located, and the network device where the first terminal device is located then forwards the BFRR to the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device may send a second response message to the second terminal device, and the second response message may be a BFRR response message. If the first terminal device and the second terminal device are within the coverage of the same network device, the first terminal device may send a second response message to the network device, and after receiving the second response message, the network device may send The second response message is forwarded to the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device may carry the second response message in the PUCCH or PUSCH and send it to the network device. Or, even if the first terminal device and the second terminal device are within the coverage of the same network device, the first terminal device can directly send the second response message to the second terminal device without transferring through the network device, which can reduce Hourly delay.
  • the first terminal device may directly send the second response message to the second terminal device, or the first terminal device may send the second response message Sent to the network device where the first terminal device is located, the network device where the first terminal device is located forwards the second response message to the network device where the second terminal device is located, and the network device where the second terminal device is located then forwards the second response message To the second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device may maintain a first time window, for example, represented as a time window W1, and the second terminal device may detect the second response message within the time window W1. If the second response message is not detected within the time window W1, the second terminal device may send the BFRR to the first terminal device again, and detect the second response message again, and so on.
  • the total number of BFRRs sent by the second terminal device may be configured by the second terminal device, or configured by the network device, or configured by the first terminal device, or specified by a protocol. For example, the total number of BFRRs sent by the second terminal device may be a positive integer.
  • the second terminal device can inform the upper layer of the second terminal device, the upper layer of the second terminal device Beam recovery can be performed.
  • K1 beams are high-frequency beams, that is, FR2 beams.
  • the second terminal device sends BFRR to the first terminal device, it can be sent over the FR2 link, or it can be sent over the first frequency range (frequency range 1, FR1) link, for example, it can be sent via PSCCH or physical side line sharing. Channel (physical sidelink share channel, PSSCH) to send BFRR.
  • PSSCH physical sidelink share channel
  • the BFRR is sent through the PSSCH, one way may be to carry the BFRR in a MAC control element (CE). Since K1 beams have failed, sending BFRR through the FR1 link can increase the success rate of BFRR transmission.
  • the first terminal device sends the second response message to the second terminal device, which may be sent through the FR2 link, or may also be sent through the FR1 link, for example, the second response message is sent through the PSCCH or PSSCH.
  • the second terminal device may perform measurement on the K2 first reference signals after receiving the K2 first reference signals, After obtaining the measurement result, the second terminal device may send a first message to the first terminal device, and the first message may indicate the measurement result of the K2 first reference signals by the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device receives the first message from the second terminal device, and can obtain the measurement results of K2 first reference signals.
  • the measurement result is RSRP
  • the hypothetical PSCCH BLER corresponding to the RSRP of the first reference signal transmitted in a beam is greater than a given threshold, the first terminal device considers that the beam has failed.
  • the first terminal device can determine whether the beams in the K1 directions have failed N1 consecutive times.
  • the measurement result may also be reference signal receiving quality (RSRQ), etc., which is not limited.
  • the first message sent by the second terminal device to the first terminal device may not include the measurement results of the K2 first reference signals, but may include the first indication information, which may indicate that the K1 beams are Available beams, or indicate that K1 beams are not available.
  • the first terminal device receives the first message from the second terminal device, and can determine the available beams among the K1 beams, or determine that none of the K1 beams are available.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device do not need to exchange BFRR and the second response message, which reduces the steps of the beam detection process and further improves the efficiency of beam recovery.
  • S33 and S34 can be executed; or, as an alternative, before S33 is executed, S35 and S36 can also be executed.
  • S31 and S35 may be executed at the same time, or S31 may be executed first and then S35 may be executed.
  • the first terminal device sends P2 second reference signals to the second terminal device in the P1 direction
  • the second terminal device receives the P2 second reference signals sent by the first terminal device in the P1 direction, or in other words,
  • the second terminal device receives P2 second reference signals in P1 directions corresponding to the first terminal device.
  • the P1 directions corresponding to the first terminal device refer to the P1 transmission directions of the first terminal device. Therefore, the P2 second reference signal is sent by the first terminal device to the second terminal device and is sent through the P1 direction .
  • the P1 directions are all the transmission directions of the first terminal device. Therefore, the P1 directions may also be referred to as P1 transmission directions. Both P1 and P2 are positive integers, and P2 may be greater than or equal to P1, that is, in one of the directions of P1, one or more first reference signals may be sent.
  • the P1 directions may correspond to P1 beams, or P1 transmission beams, and one of the P2 second reference signals may be used to measure the quality of the beams in the corresponding direction.
  • the so-called "corresponding direction” may refer to the direction in which the second reference signal is located, or refer to the sending direction of the second reference signal, or refer to the second reference signal The direction in which the beam is pointing.
  • the second reference signal is, for example, CSI-RS or SSB.
  • the so-called “beam in the corresponding direction” refers to the beam used to transmit the second reference signal.
  • the second reference signal 1 in the P2 second reference signals is sent in the direction 2 of the P1 directions, and the beam in the direction corresponding to the second reference signal 1 refers to the beam in the direction 2.
  • the P1 directions may be part of all the transmission directions supported by the first terminal device.
  • the P1 directions may or may not include K1 directions.
  • the directions are 32 directions in addition to the K1 directions among the 64 directions.
  • the P1 directions may also be all transmission directions supported by the first terminal device.
  • the P1 directions include K1 directions, and P1 is greater than or equal to K1.
  • the first terminal device can continue to determine whether there are available beams in more directions (ie P1 directions), and the possibility of having beams available in the P1 directions will be greater than There is the possibility of usable beams in K1 directions, which improves the possibility of obtaining usable beams. In this way, it is possible to determine the available beam through the physical layer as much as possible, or to restore the beam through the physical layer, which reduces the probability of recovering the beam through the higher layer. For the side link, there is no node that continuously sends reference signals. If the upper layer recovers the beam, the upper layer may not be able to obtain the reference signal for beam recovery for a long time, which makes the beam recovery more efficient.
  • beam recovery is performed through the physical layer as much as possible, which improves the efficiency of beam recovery and reduces the service delay caused by beam failure.
  • the second terminal device sends the measurement result of the P2 second reference signals to the first terminal device, and the first terminal device receives the measurement result of the P2 second reference signals from the second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device may measure the P2 second reference signal to obtain the measurement result.
  • the second terminal device may send a first response message to the first terminal device, the first response message includes the measurement result of P2 second reference signals, and the first terminal device receives the first response message from the second terminal device to obtain P2 second reference signal measurement result.
  • the first response message sent by the second terminal device to the first terminal device may not include the measurement results of P2 second reference signals, but may include second indication information, which may indicate P1 beams The available beams in P1, or indicate that none of the P1 beams are available.
  • the second terminal device may send a first response message to the network device, and after the network device receives the first response message, The first response message may be forwarded to the first terminal device.
  • the second terminal device may carry the first response message in the PUCCH or PUSCH and send it to the network device.
  • the second terminal device can directly send the first response message to the first terminal device without transferring it through the network device. Hourly delay.
  • the second terminal device may directly send the first response message to the first terminal device, or the second terminal device may send the first response message Sent to the network device where the second terminal device is located, the network device where the second terminal device is located forwards the first response message to the network device where the first terminal device is located, and the network device where the first terminal device is located then forwards the first response message To the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device sends M2 third reference signals to the second terminal device in M1 directions, and the second terminal device receives M2 third reference signals sent by the first terminal device in M1 directions, or in other words, The second terminal device receives M2 third reference signals in M1 directions corresponding to the first terminal device.
  • the M1 directions corresponding to the first terminal device refer to the M1 transmission directions of the first terminal device. Therefore, the M2 third reference signals are sent by the first terminal device to the second terminal device and are sent through the M1 directions .
  • the M1 beams may be candidate beams of the first terminal device.
  • the M1 beams are all candidate beams of the first terminal device, or part of the candidate beams of the first terminal device.
  • the P1 directions may include M1 directions, that is, the P1 directions may include K1 directions and M1 directions.
  • the P1 directions may also include other directions.
  • the 64 beams also include The remaining 60 beams.
  • the P1 directions may only include K1 directions and M1 directions, and no other directions are included.
  • the P1 directions are part of all the transmission directions supported by the first terminal device. In this case, the P1 directions may or may not include M1 directions.
  • the first terminal device determines that for N2 consecutive times, none of the beams in the M1 directions can be used to restore the communication connection.
  • N2 is a positive integer.
  • the so-called “restoration of the communication connection” refers to the restoration of the communication connection between the first terminal device and the second terminal device.
  • N2 can be configured by a network device, or can be configured by a first terminal device, or configured by a second terminal device, or can also be specified by a protocol.
  • the BFD conditions may include: N1 consecutive times, all beams in K1 directions fail, and N2 consecutive times, none of the beams in M1 directions can be used to restore the communication connection.
  • the BFD conditions may also include other conditions.
  • the second terminal device can compare the M2 second reference signals after receiving the M2 second reference signals. The signal is measured, and based on the measurement result, it is determined whether M1 beams can be used to restore the communication connection. For example, the measurement result is RSRP. If the RSRP of the third reference signal transmitted in a beam is greater than the second threshold, the second terminal device considers that the beam can be used to restore the communication connection, otherwise it is considered that it cannot be used to restore the communication connection.
  • the second threshold is, for example, equal to the threshold in step 2 as described above, or the second threshold may be configured by the network device, or may be configured by the first terminal device, or configured by the second terminal device, or may also be through an agreement Regulations. If it is determined that the beams in the K1 directions have failed for N1 consecutive times, and the beams in the M1 directions cannot be used to restore the communication connection for N2 consecutive times, the second terminal device can send BFRR to the first terminal device, and the second terminal device can send BFRR to the first terminal device. One terminal device can receive the BFRR from the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device may send a second response message to the second terminal device, and the second response message may be a BFRR response message.
  • the second response message may be a BFRR response message.
  • the second terminal device can perform a pair of M2 second reference signals after receiving M2 second reference signals.
  • the second reference signal is measured to obtain the measurement result
  • the second terminal device may send a fourth message to the first terminal device, and the fourth message may indicate the measurement result of the second terminal device on the M2 second reference signals, and the second terminal device
  • the measurement result may be sent to the first terminal device through the fourth message, and the first terminal device may receive the fourth message from the second terminal device.
  • the measurement result is RSRP, and if the RSRP of the second reference signal transmitted in a beam is lower than the second threshold, the first terminal device considers that the beam cannot be used to restore the communication connection. Therefore, the first terminal device can determine whether the beams in the M1 directions can not be used to restore the communication connection for N2 consecutive times.
  • the measurement result may also be RSRQ, etc., which is not limited.
  • the first terminal device can send P2 to the second terminal device after determining that the beams in K1 directions have failed for N1 consecutive times.
  • Second reference signal or, if S35 and S36 are to be executed after S32, and then S33 and S34 are executed again, then it is equivalent to that the first terminal device fails to determine that the beams in the K1 directions consecutively N1 times have failed, and determine After N2 consecutive beams in M1 directions cannot be used to restore the communication connection, P2 second reference signals are sent to the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device determines whether the P1 beams corresponding to the P1 directions are available according to the measurement results of the P2 second reference signals.
  • the first terminal device may determine the P1 direction according to the measurement result of the P2 second reference signal Whether the corresponding P1 beams are available.
  • the measurement result is, for example, RSRP. If the first terminal device determines that an RSRP is greater than the third threshold, the first terminal device determines that the beam corresponding to the second reference signal corresponding to the RSRP is an available beam; otherwise, if the first terminal device determines If an RSRP is less than or equal to the third threshold, the first terminal device determines that the beam corresponding to the second reference signal corresponding to the RSRP is an unusable beam.
  • the third threshold may be configured by the network device, or may be configured by the first terminal device, or configured by the second terminal device, or may also be specified through a protocol.
  • the measurement result of the second reference signal may also be RSRQ, etc., which is not specifically limited.
  • what the second terminal device sends to the first terminal device in S34 may also be indication information, and the indication information may indicate available beams in P1 beams, or indicate that all P1 beams are unavailable. Then, after the first terminal device receives the instruction information, it can determine whether the P1 beams are available, and there is no need to judge based on the measurement result, which simplifies the implementation of the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device may send a second message to the second terminal device.
  • the second message is used to indicate the available beams in the P1 beams, or indicate that none of the P1 beams are available.
  • the second terminal device may determine which beams are available in the P1 beams according to the second message, or if the second message indicates P1 If none of the beams are available, the second terminal device can determine that all P1 beams are unavailable according to the second message. If the second message indicates the beams available in P1 beams, one way is that the second message includes the identifiers of the beams available in P1 beams.
  • the beam identifiers are, for example, the ID of the beam or the number of the beam.
  • the second terminal device According to the identifiers of the beams included in the second message, it can be determined that the beams corresponding to these identifiers are available beams.
  • the first terminal device may send a second message to the second terminal device. Used to indicate the beams available in P1 beams. After receiving the second message, the second terminal device may determine which beams of the P1 beams are available according to the second message. If there are no available beams in the P1 beams, the first terminal device may not send the second message to the second terminal device. If the second terminal device does not receive the second message from the first terminal device, it can be determined that none of the P1 beams are available.
  • the first terminal device may directly send the second message to the second terminal device, or the first terminal device may send the second message to The network device where the first terminal device is located, the network device where the first terminal device is located forwards the second message to the network device where the second terminal device is located, and the network device where the second terminal device is located then forwards the second message to the second terminal Device.
  • the first terminal device may not send a message to the second terminal device, that is, not send the second message. If the second terminal device does not receive the second message from the first terminal device, it can be determined that none of the P1 beams are available.
  • the first terminal device determines that there are available beams in the P1 beams, the first terminal device can select part or all of the available beams as the service beams of the first terminal device, which is equivalent to completing beam recovery.
  • the second terminal device determines that there are available beams in the P1 beams, the second terminal device can determine that some or all of the available beams are the service beams of the first terminal device. , Which is equivalent to completing beam recovery. For example, which available beams are selected as the new service beams can be selected by the first terminal device.
  • a third message can be sent to the second terminal device. The third message is used to indicate the new service beam.
  • the third message may include the identification of the new service beam.
  • the second terminal device can determine which beams are used as the new serving beams of the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device can inform the upper layer of the first terminal device that the upper layer of the first terminal device can perform beam recovery.
  • the second terminal device determines that none of the P1 beams are available, the second terminal device can inform the upper layer of the second terminal device that the upper layer of the second terminal device can perform beam recovery.
  • the upper layer of the second terminal device may cooperate with the upper layer of the first terminal device to perform beam recovery.
  • the upper layer of the first terminal device may cooperate with the upper layer of the second terminal device to perform beam recovery.
  • the upper layer of the first terminal device and the upper layer of the second terminal device may use radio link monitoring (RLM) methods to perform beam recovery.
  • RLM radio link monitoring
  • the upper layer of the terminal device includes, for example, the following one or more layers: the RRC layer, the media access control (MAC) layer, the radio link control (RLC) layer, or the packet data convergence protocol ( packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer.
  • the upper layer of the terminal device includes the RRC layer; or, the upper layer of the terminal device includes the RLC layer and the PDCP layer; or, the upper layer of the terminal device includes the MAC layer; or, the upper layer of the terminal device includes the MAC layer, the RLC layer, the PDCP layer, and the RRC layer. Layers, etc.
  • the first terminal device can send the first reference signal to the second terminal device, so that the first terminal device can determine whether the beam in the K1 direction fails, which is equivalent to providing a method for performing SL communication.
  • the mechanism of beam failure detection if the first terminal device determines that the beam in the K1 direction fails, the first terminal device may also send P2 second reference signals to the second terminal device in the P1 direction.
  • the K1 direction is the first The direction corresponding to the service beam of a terminal device, and the P1 directions are part or all of all the transmission directions supported by the first terminal device, and the number of directions included in the P1 directions may be greater than those included in the K1 directions That is, if the beams in K1 directions fail, the first terminal device can continue to determine whether there are beams available in more directions (ie P1 directions), and there are beams available in P1 directions The possibility will be greater than the possibility of available beams in K1 directions, which increases the possibility of obtaining available beams. In this way, try to determine the available beams through the physical layer, or restore the beams through the physical layer, without using higher layers to restore the beams, which improves the efficiency of beam recovery and reduces the service delay caused by beam failure. .
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a second communication method.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart of this method.
  • the application of this method to the network architecture shown in FIG. 2 is taken as an example.
  • the method can be executed by two communication devices, for example, the first communication device and the second communication device.
  • the first communication device or the second communication device may be a network device or a communication device capable of supporting the network device to implement the functions required by the method, or may be a terminal device or a terminal device capable of supporting the functions required by the terminal device to implement the method.
  • the communication device may also be other communication devices, such as a chip.
  • the two communication devices can be implemented in the same form, for example, both can be implemented in the form of equipment, or the two communication devices can also be implemented as Different forms, for example, the first communication device is implemented in the form of equipment, the second communication device is implemented in the form of chips, and so on.
  • the network device is, for example, a base station.
  • the method executed by the terminal device and the terminal device is taken as an example, that is, the first communication device is a terminal device (for example, referred to as the first terminal device), and the second communication device is also a terminal device ( For example, it is called the second terminal device) as an example.
  • the first terminal device described below can implement the functions of the terminal device 1 in the network architecture shown in FIG.
  • the second terminal device may implement the functions of the terminal device 2 in the network architecture shown in FIG. 2.
  • the first terminal device sends K2 first reference signals to the second terminal device in K1 sending directions, and the second terminal device receives K2 first reference signals sent by the first terminal device in K1 sending directions, or In other words, the second terminal device receives K2 first reference signals in K1 directions corresponding to the first terminal device.
  • the K1 directions corresponding to the first terminal device refer to the K1 transmission directions of the first terminal device. Therefore, the K2 first reference signals are sent by the first terminal device to the second terminal device and are sent through the K1 directions .
  • the second terminal device determines that the beams in the K1 transmission directions have failed for N1 consecutive times.
  • N1 is a positive integer.
  • N1 can be configured by a network device, or can be configured by a first terminal device, or configured by a second terminal device, or can also be specified by a protocol.
  • the beams in the K1 transmission directions all failed.
  • This can be considered as the content included in the BFD condition, or in other words, it is considered as a condition of the BFD.
  • the BFD condition may include only this one, or may also include other conditions.
  • the second terminal device may measure the K2 first reference signals, and determine whether the K1 beams have failed according to the measurement result.
  • the measurement result is RSRP
  • the second terminal device considers that the beam has failed.
  • the first threshold is, for example, equal to the threshold in the BFD condition in step 1 described above, or the first threshold may be configured by the network device, or may be configured by the first terminal device, or configured by the second terminal device, or also It can be stipulated by agreement.
  • S43 and S44 may be executed; or, as an alternative, before S43 is executed, S45 and S46 may also be executed.
  • the second terminal device sends P2 second reference signals to the first terminal device, and the first terminal device receives P2 second reference signals from the second terminal device in P3 receiving directions.
  • the P3 reception directions correspond to the P1 transmission directions of the first terminal device. Therefore, it can be considered that the P2 second reference signals correspond to the P1 transmission directions of the first terminal device.
  • P1 is a positive integer
  • P2 is an integer greater than or equal to P3.
  • the first terminal device can be regarded as having a beam correspondence (beam correspondence) property. Then, if the first terminal device receives P2 second reference signals through P3 receiving beams, and P3 receiving beams correspond to P1 sending beams, it can be considered that P2 second reference signals correspond to P1 sending beams.
  • One of the P2 second reference signals can be used to measure the quality of the beam in the receiving direction of the first terminal device where the second reference signal is located, and the beam quality in the receiving direction of the first terminal device. The quality corresponds to the quality of the beam in one transmission direction of the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device measures P2 second reference signals.
  • the first terminal device may measure the P2 second reference signals to obtain the measurement result.
  • the measurement result is, for example, RSRP, or RSRQ, etc., which is not specifically limited.
  • the first terminal device sends M2 third reference signals to the second terminal device in M1 sending directions, and the second terminal device receives M2 third reference signals sent by the first terminal device in M1 sending directions, or In other words, the second terminal device receives M2 third reference signals in M1 directions corresponding to the first terminal device.
  • the M1 directions corresponding to the first terminal device refer to the M1 transmission directions of the first terminal device. Therefore, the M2 third reference signals are sent by the first terminal device to the second terminal device and are sent through the M1 directions .
  • the second terminal device determines that for N2 consecutive times, none of the beams in the M1 transmission directions can be used to restore the communication connection.
  • N2 is a positive integer.
  • N2 can be configured by a network device, or can be configured by a first terminal device, or configured by a second terminal device, or can also be specified by a protocol.
  • the BFD conditions may include: N1 consecutive times, all beams in K1 directions fail, and N2 consecutive times, none of the beams in M1 directions can be used to restore the communication connection.
  • the BFD conditions may also include other conditions.
  • the second terminal device may measure the M2 second reference signals to obtain the measurement result.
  • the measurement result is RSRP
  • the second terminal device considers that the beam cannot be used to restore the communication connection. Therefore, the second terminal device can determine whether the beams in the M1 transmission directions can not be used to restore the communication connection for N2 consecutive times.
  • the measurement result may also be RSRQ, etc., which is not limited.
  • S43 and S44 are executed directly after S42, that is, S45 and S46 are not executed, it is equivalent to that the second terminal device can send P2 to the first terminal device after determining that the beams in K1 directions have failed for N1 consecutive times.
  • Second reference signal or, if S45 and S46 are executed after S42, and then S43 and S44 are executed, then it is equivalent to that the second terminal device has failed to determine that the beams in the K1 directions consecutively N1 times, and determine After N2 consecutive beams in M1 directions cannot be used to restore the communication connection, P2 second reference signals may be sent to the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device may determine whether the P1 beams corresponding to the P1 directions are available according to the measurement results of the P2 second reference signals obtained in S44.
  • the measurement result is, for example, RSRP. If the first terminal device determines that an RSRP is greater than the third threshold, the first terminal device determines that the beam corresponding to the second reference signal corresponding to the RSRP is an available beam; otherwise, if the first terminal device determines If an RSRP is less than or equal to the third threshold, the first terminal device determines that the beam corresponding to the second reference signal corresponding to the RSRP is an unusable beam.
  • the third threshold may be configured by the network device, or may be configured by the first terminal device, or configured by the second terminal device, or may also be specified through a protocol. Alternatively, the measurement result of the second reference signal may also be RSRQ, etc., which is not specifically limited.
  • the second terminal device determines, according to the P2 second reference signals, whether the P1 beams corresponding to the P1 transmission directions are available.
  • the first response message indicates the beams available in the P1 beams
  • one way is that the first response message includes the identifiers of the available beams in the P1 beams.
  • the identifiers of the beams are, for example, the ID of the beam or the number of the beam.
  • the second The terminal device can determine that the beams corresponding to these identifiers are available beams according to the identifiers of the beams included in the first response message.
  • the first terminal device may send a first response message to the second terminal device, and the first terminal device may send a first response message to the second terminal device.
  • the response message is used to indicate the available beams among the P1 beams.
  • the second terminal device can determine which beams of the P1 beams are available according to the first response message. If there are no available beams in the P1 beams, the first terminal device may not send the first response message to the second terminal device. If the second terminal device does not receive the first response message from the first terminal device, it can be determined that none of the P1 beams are available.
  • the first terminal device may send a first response message to the network device, and after the network device receives the first response message, The first response message can be forwarded to the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device may carry the first response message in the PUCCH or PUSCH and send it to the network device.
  • the first terminal device can directly send the first response message to the second terminal device without transferring it through the network device. Hourly delay.
  • the first terminal device may directly send the first response message to the second terminal device, or the first terminal device may send the first response message Sent to the network device where the first terminal device is located, the network device where the first terminal device is located forwards the first response message to the network device where the second terminal device is located, and the network device where the second terminal device is located then forwards the first response message To the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device determines that there are available beams in the P1 beams, then the first terminal device can select part or all of the available beams as the service beams of the first terminal device, which is equivalent to completing the beam restore.
  • the second terminal device determines that there are available beams in the P1 beams, then the second terminal device can determine that some or all of the available beams are the first terminal
  • the service beam of the device is equivalent to completing beam recovery. For example, which available beams are selected as the new service beams can be selected by the first terminal device.
  • a third message can be sent to the second terminal device.
  • the third message is used to indicate the new service beam.
  • the third message may include the identification of the new service beam.
  • the second terminal device can determine which beams are used as the new serving beams of the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device may send a third message to the network device, and after receiving the third message, the network device may send The third message is forwarded to the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device may carry the third message in the PUCCH or PUSCH and send it to the network device.
  • the first terminal device can directly send the third message to the second terminal device without transferring it through the network device, which can reduce time Extension.
  • the first terminal device may directly send the third message to the second terminal device, or the first terminal device may send the third message to The network equipment where the first terminal device is located, the network equipment where the first terminal device is located forwards the third message to the network equipment where the second terminal device is located, and the network equipment where the second terminal device is located forwards the third message to the second terminal Device.
  • the first terminal device determines that none of the P1 beams are available, the first terminal device can inform the upper layer of the first terminal device that the upper layer of the first terminal device can perform beam recovery.
  • the second terminal device determines that none of the P1 beams are available, the second terminal device can inform the upper layer of the second terminal device that the upper layer of the second terminal device can perform beam recovery.
  • the upper layer of the second terminal device may cooperate with the upper layer of the first terminal device to perform beam recovery.
  • the upper layer of the first terminal device may cooperate with the upper layer of the second terminal device to perform beam recovery.
  • the upper layer of the first terminal device and the upper layer of the second terminal device may use RLM and other methods to perform beam recovery.
  • the upper layers of the terminal device include, for example, one or more of the following: RRC layer, MAC layer, RLC layer, or PDCP layer.
  • the upper layer of the terminal device includes the RRC layer; or, the upper layer of the terminal device includes the RLC layer and the PDCP layer; or, the upper layer of the terminal device includes the MAC layer; or, the upper layer of the terminal device includes the MAC layer, the RLC layer, the PDCP layer, and the RRC layer. Layers, etc.
  • the first terminal device can send the first reference signal to the second terminal device, so that the first terminal device can determine whether the beams in the K1 transmission directions have failed, which is equivalent to providing a method in SL communication
  • the mechanism for beam failure detection if the second terminal device determines that the beam in the K1 transmission direction fails, the second terminal device can also send P2 second reference signals to the first terminal device, and the first terminal device receives the second reference signal from the first terminal device in the P3 reception direction.
  • the P2 second reference signal of the second terminal device can be understood as that the K1 transmission direction is the direction corresponding to the service beam of the first terminal device, and the P3 reception direction is a part or part of all the reception directions supported by the first terminal device. All.
  • Each beam correspondence includes a sending beam and a receiving beam.
  • the sending beam and the receiving beam indicated by each beam correspondence have a one-to-one correspondence. Therefore, the P3 receiving beams may correspond to the P1 transmitting beams of the first terminal device. Then, the P3 receiving directions correspond to the P1 transmitting directions of the first terminal device.
  • the number of directions included in the P1 transmission directions may be greater than the number of directions included in the K1 transmission directions, that is, if the beams in the K1 transmission directions fail, the first terminal device may continue to determine more Whether there is an available beam in the direction (ie, P1 transmission direction), and the possibility of an available beam in the P1 transmission direction is greater than the possibility of an available beam in the K1 transmission direction, which improves the possibility of obtaining an available beam. In this way, try to determine the available beams through the physical layer, or restore the beams through the physical layer, without using higher layers to restore the beams, which improves the efficiency of beam recovery and reduces the service delay caused by beam failure. .
  • the BFD condition may include condition 1, or may include condition 1 and condition 2.
  • the condition 1 is that the beams in the K1 directions have failed for N1 consecutive times;
  • the condition 2 is that the beams in the M1 directions can not be used to restore the communication connection for N2 consecutive times.
  • the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 and the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 both introduce the processing method when the condition 1 and the condition 2 are satisfied at the same time. And there is another possibility that only condition 1 is satisfied, and condition 2 is not satisfied. For this reason, the embodiment of the present application provides a third communication method to introduce the processing method when the condition 1 is satisfied but the condition 2 is not satisfied. Please refer to Figure 4, which is a flowchart of this method.
  • the method can be executed by two communication devices, for example, the first communication device and the second communication device.
  • the first communication device or the second communication device may be a network device or a communication device capable of supporting the network device to implement the functions required by the method, or may be a terminal device or a terminal device capable of supporting the functions required by the terminal device to implement the method.
  • the communication device may also be other communication devices, such as a chip. And there are no restrictions on the implementation of the first communication device or the second communication device.
  • the two communication devices can be implemented in the same form, for example, both can be implemented in the form of equipment, or the two communication devices can also be implemented as Different forms, for example, the first communication device is implemented in the form of equipment, the second communication device is implemented in the form of chips, and so on.
  • the network device is, for example, a base station.
  • the method executed by the terminal device and the terminal device is taken as an example, that is, the first communication device is a terminal device (for example, referred to as the first terminal device), and the second communication device is also a terminal device ( For example, it is called the second terminal device) as an example.
  • the first terminal device described below can implement the functions of the terminal device 1 in the network architecture shown in FIG.
  • the second terminal device may implement the functions of the terminal device 2 in the network architecture shown in FIG. 2.
  • the first terminal device sends K2 first reference signals to the second terminal device in K1 transmission directions, and the second terminal device receives K2 first reference signals sent by the first terminal device in K1 transmission directions.
  • the second terminal device receives K2 first reference signals in K1 directions corresponding to the first terminal device.
  • the K1 directions corresponding to the first terminal device refer to the K1 transmission directions of the first terminal device. Therefore, the K2 first reference signals are sent by the first terminal device to the second terminal device and are sent through the K1 directions .
  • the second terminal device determines that the condition 1 that all the beams in the K1 transmission directions fails for N1 consecutive times is established. In other words, the second terminal device determines that the beams in the K1 transmission directions have failed for N1 consecutive times.
  • N1 can be configured by a network device, or can be configured by a first terminal device, or configured by a second terminal device, or can also be specified by a protocol.
  • N1 is a positive integer.
  • the second terminal device may measure the K2 first reference signals, and determine whether the K1 beams have failed according to the measurement result.
  • the measurement result is RSRP
  • the second terminal device considers that the beam has failed. In this way, the second terminal device can determine whether the beams in the K1 transmission directions have failed for N1 consecutive times.
  • the first threshold is, for example, equal to the threshold in the BFD condition in step 1 as described above, or the first threshold may be configured by the network device, or may be configured by the first terminal device, or configured by the second terminal device, or also It can be stipulated by agreement.
  • the second terminal device determines that the condition 1 that all the beams in the K1 transmission directions fails for N1 consecutive times is established.
  • the first terminal device sends M2 third reference signals to the second terminal device in M1 sending directions, and the second terminal device receives M2 third reference signals sent by the first terminal device in M1 sending directions, or In other words, the second terminal device receives M2 third reference signals in M1 directions corresponding to the first terminal device.
  • the M1 directions corresponding to the first terminal device refer to the M1 transmission directions of the first terminal device. Therefore, the M2 third reference signals are sent by the first terminal device to the second terminal device and are sent through the M1 directions .
  • S501 may occur before S503, or S501 may occur after S503, or S501 and S503 may occur simultaneously.
  • the second terminal device determines that for N2 consecutive times, the condition that none of the beams in the M1 transmission directions can be used to restore the communication connection is not established. In other words, the second terminal device determines that the beams in the M1 transmission directions can be used to restore the communication connection.
  • N2 is a positive integer.
  • N2 may be configured by the network device, or may be configured by the first terminal device, or configured by the second terminal device, or may also be specified by a protocol.
  • the second terminal device may measure the M2 second reference signals, and determine whether the M1 beams can be used to restore the communication connection according to the measurement result.
  • the measurement result is RSRP
  • the second terminal device considers that the beam cannot be used to restore the communication connection. In this way, the second terminal device can determine whether N2 consecutive times, and none of the beams in the M1 transmission directions can be used to restore the communication connection.
  • the second threshold is, for example, equal to the threshold in step 2 as described above, or the second threshold may be configured by the network device, or may be configured by the first terminal device, or configured by the second terminal device, or may also be through an agreement Regulations.
  • the condition that the second terminal device determines that none of the beams in the M1 transmission directions can be used to restore the communication connection for N2 consecutive times is not established.
  • the second terminal device sends a BFRR to the first terminal device, and the first terminal device receives the BFRR from the second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device can A terminal device transmits BFRR, and the first terminal device can receive the BFRR from the second terminal device.
  • BFRR can indicate that the condition that the beams in the K1 transmission directions have failed for N1 consecutive times is established, and that the condition that the beams in the M1 transmission directions for N2 consecutive times cannot be used to restore the communication connection is not established .
  • the first terminal device can determine that the beams in the K1 transmission directions have failed for N1 consecutive times, and that the beams in the M1 transmission directions can not be used to restore the communication connection for N2 consecutive times. invalid.
  • the manner in which the first terminal device sends BFRR to the second terminal device, etc. please refer to the relevant introduction in S32.
  • the second terminal device determines that the second response message is not received, the second terminal device sends P2 second reference signals to the first terminal device, and the first terminal device receives P2 from the second terminal device in P3 receiving directions.
  • the second response message may be a BFRR response message.
  • the P3 reception directions correspond to the P1 transmission directions of the first terminal device. Therefore, it can be considered that the P2 second reference signals correspond to the P1 transmission directions of the first terminal device.
  • P1 is a positive integer
  • P2 is an integer greater than or equal to P3.
  • S507 The first terminal device measures P2 second reference signals.
  • the second terminal device determines, according to the P2 second reference signals, whether the P1 beams corresponding to the P1 transmission directions are available.
  • S510 may also be performed.
  • the first terminal device may send a first response message to the second terminal device, and the first response message is used to indicate The available beams among the P1 beams, or indicate that none of the P1 beams are available.
  • the second terminal device receives the first response message, if the first response message indicates the beams available in the P1 beams, the second terminal device can determine which beams are available in the P1 beams according to the first response message, or if the first response message The response message indicates that all P1 beams are unavailable, and the second terminal device can determine that all P1 beams are unavailable according to the first response message.
  • the first response message indicates the beams available in the P1 beams
  • one way is that the first response message includes the identifiers of the available beams in the P1 beams.
  • the identifiers of the beams are, for example, the ID of the beam or the number of the beam.
  • the second The terminal device can determine that the beams corresponding to these identifiers are available beams according to the identifiers of the beams included in the first response message.
  • the first terminal device may send a first response message to the second terminal device, and the first terminal device may send a first response message to the second terminal device.
  • the response message is used to indicate the available beams among the P1 beams.
  • the second terminal device can determine which beams of the P1 beams are available according to the first response message. If there are no available beams in the P1 beams, the first terminal device may not send the first response message to the second terminal device. If the second terminal device does not receive the first response message from the first terminal device, it can be determined that none of the P1 beams are available.
  • the first terminal device can send the first reference signal and the second reference signal to the second terminal device, so that the first terminal device can determine whether the beams in the K1 transmission directions have failed, and determine whether the M1 transmission Whether the beam in the direction can be used to restore the communication connection is equivalent to providing a mechanism for beam failure detection in SL communication.
  • the second terminal device determines that the beams in the K1 transmission directions have failed, and the beams in the M1 transmission directions can be used to restore the communication connection
  • the BFRR is sent to the first terminal device so that the first terminal device will serve the beam
  • the transmission beams corresponding to the K1 transmission directions are changed to the transmission beams corresponding to the M1 transmission directions, which can be used to restore the communication connection.
  • the second terminal device may not notify the higher layer temporarily, but sends P2 second reference signals to the first terminal device.
  • a terminal device receives P2 second reference signals from a second terminal device in P3 receiving directions.
  • the K1 sending directions are the directions corresponding to the service beam of the first terminal device
  • the P3 receiving directions are part or all of all the receiving directions supported by the first terminal device.
  • one or more beam correspondences may be supported. Each beam correspondence includes a sending beam and a receiving beam, and the sending beam and the receiving beam in each beam correspondence have a one-to-one correspondence.
  • the P3 receiving beams may correspond to the P1 transmitting beams of the first terminal device, and then the P3 receiving directions correspond to the P1 transmitting directions of the first terminal device.
  • the number of directions included in the P1 directions can be greater than the number of K1 directions, that is, if the beams in the K1 directions fail, the first terminal device can continue to determine more directions (ie, P1 directions) Whether there is an available beam on the P1 direction, and the possibility of an available beam in the P1 direction is greater than the possibility of an available beam in the K1 direction, which improves the possibility of obtaining an available beam. In this way, try to determine the available beams through the physical layer, or restore the beams through the physical layer, without using higher layers to restore the beams, which improves the efficiency of beam recovery and reduces the service delay caused by beam failure. .
  • the method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 is a processing method when the second terminal device determines that the condition 1 is satisfied but the condition 2 is not satisfied.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a fourth communication method to introduce another processing method when the first terminal device determines that the condition 1 is satisfied but the condition 2 is not satisfied. Please refer to Figure 6, which is a flowchart of this method.
  • the method can be executed by two communication devices, for example, the first communication device and the second communication device.
  • the first communication device or the second communication device may be a network device or a communication device capable of supporting the network device to implement the functions required by the method, or may be a terminal device or a terminal device capable of supporting the functions required by the terminal device to implement the method.
  • the communication device may also be other communication devices, such as a chip. And there are no restrictions on the implementation of the first communication device or the second communication device.
  • the method executed by the terminal device and the terminal device is taken as an example, that is, the first communication device is a terminal device (for example, referred to as the first terminal device), and the second communication device is also a terminal device ( For example, it is called the second terminal device) as an example.
  • the first terminal device described below can implement the functions of the terminal device 1 in the network architecture shown in FIG.
  • the second terminal device may implement the functions of the terminal device 2 in the network architecture shown in FIG. 2.
  • the first terminal device sends K2 first reference signals to the second terminal device in K1 transmission directions, and the second terminal device receives K2 first reference signals sent by the first terminal device in K1 transmission directions.
  • the second terminal device receives K2 first reference signals in K1 directions corresponding to the first terminal device.
  • the K1 directions corresponding to the first terminal device refer to the K1 transmission directions of the first terminal device. Therefore, the K2 first reference signals are sent by the first terminal device to the second terminal device and are sent through the K1 directions .
  • the first terminal device determines that the condition (condition 1) that all beams in the K1 transmission directions have failed for N1 consecutive times is established. In other words, the first terminal device determines that the beams in the K1 transmission directions have failed for N1 consecutive times.
  • N1 can be configured by a network device, or can be configured by a first terminal device, or configured by a second terminal device, or can also be specified by a protocol.
  • N1 is a positive integer.
  • the first terminal device determines, based on the measurement result of BFRR or K2 second reference signals from the second terminal device, that the condition 1 that all beams in the K1 transmission directions have failed for N1 consecutive times is established.
  • the first terminal device sends M2 third reference signals to the second terminal device in M1 sending directions, and the second terminal device receives M2 third reference signals sent by the first terminal device in M1 sending directions, or In other words, the second terminal device receives M2 third reference signals in M1 directions corresponding to the first terminal device.
  • the M1 directions corresponding to the first terminal device refer to the M1 transmission directions of the first terminal device. Therefore, the M2 third reference signals are sent by the first terminal device to the second terminal device and are sent through the M1 directions .
  • the first terminal device determines that for N2 consecutive times, the condition (condition 2) that none of the beams in the M1 transmission directions can be used to restore the communication connection is not established. In other words, the first terminal device determines that the beams in the M1 transmission directions can be used to restore the communication connection.
  • N2 is a positive integer.
  • N2 may be configured by the network device, or may be configured by the first terminal device, or configured by the second terminal device, or may also be specified by a protocol.
  • the first terminal device determines the condition that none of the beams in the M1 transmission directions can be used to restore the communication connection for N2 consecutive times based on the measurement results of the BFRR or M2 second reference signals from the second terminal device. 2 invalid.
  • the first terminal device uses K3 transmission directions among the M1 transmission directions to send K4 first reference signals to the second terminal device, and the second terminal device receives K4 signals sent by the first terminal device in the K3 transmission directions.
  • the first reference signal In other words, the second terminal device receives K4 first reference signals in K3 directions corresponding to the first terminal device.
  • the K3 directions corresponding to the first terminal device refer to the K3 transmission directions of the first terminal device. Therefore, the K4 first reference signals are sent by the first terminal device to the second terminal device and are sent through K3 directions .
  • the K3 directions are all the transmission directions of the first terminal device. Therefore, the K3 directions may also be referred to as K3 transmission directions.
  • K3 is a positive integer
  • K4 may be an integer greater than or equal to K3, that is, in one of the K3 directions, one or more first reference signals may be sent.
  • One of the K4 first reference signals can be used to detect whether the beam in the corresponding direction fails.
  • K3 of the M1 transmission directions are used to transmit K4 first reference signals to the second terminal device.
  • the K3 directions may correspond to K3 beams, or corresponding to K3 transmission beams.
  • the K3 beams may be a new service beam of the first terminal device.
  • each of the K3 beams may be used to send a data signal to the second terminal device.
  • the K3 beams are all service beams of the first terminal device, or part of the service beams of the first terminal device.
  • each of the K3 directions may be the direction in which the first terminal device sends the data signal to the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device determines that all beams in the K3 directions fail for N1 consecutive times.
  • the first terminal device may try to restore the communication connection through the M1 direction, but the attempt fails.
  • S65 and S66 are optional steps.
  • the first terminal device sends P2 second reference signals to the first terminal device in the P1 direction, and the second terminal device receives the P2 second reference signals sent by the first terminal device in the P1 direction.
  • the P1 directions corresponding to the first terminal device refer to the P1 transmission directions of the first terminal device. Therefore, the P2 second reference signal is sent by the first terminal device to the second terminal device and is sent through the P1 direction .
  • the P1 directions are all the transmission directions of the first terminal device. Therefore, the P1 directions may also be referred to as P1 transmission directions. Both P1 and P2 are positive integers, and P2 may be greater than or equal to P1, that is, in one of the directions of P1, one or more first reference signals may be sent.
  • the first terminal device determines, according to the measurement result of the P2 second reference signals, whether the P1 beams corresponding to the P1 transmission directions are available.
  • the first terminal device can send the first reference signal and the second reference signal to the second terminal device, so that the first terminal device can determine whether the beams in the K1 transmission directions have failed, and determine whether the M1 transmission Whether the beam in the direction can be used to restore the communication connection is equivalent to providing a mechanism for beam failure detection in SL communication.
  • the BFRR can be sent to the first terminal device to make the first terminal device serve The beam is changed from the transmission beam corresponding to the K1 transmission directions to the K3 transmission beams in the transmission beams corresponding to the M1 transmission directions, which can be used to restore the communication connection. If the first terminal device determines that K3 beams have failed, it may temporarily not notify the higher layer, but send P2 second reference signals to the second terminal device in the P1 direction, and the second terminal device receives P2 from the second terminal device The second reference signal.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device 700 according to an embodiment of the application.
  • the communication device 700 is the first terminal device 700, for example.
  • the first terminal device 700 includes a processing module 710 and a transceiver module 720.
  • the first terminal device 700 may be a terminal device, or may be a chip applied to the terminal device or other combination devices or components having terminal device functions.
  • the transceiver module 720 may be a transceiver
  • the transceiver may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc.
  • the processing module 710 may be a processor, such as a baseband processor.
  • the baseband processor may include one or Multiple central processing units (central processing units, CPUs).
  • the transceiver module 720 may be a radio frequency unit, and the processing module 710 may be a processor, such as a baseband processor.
  • the transceiver module 720 may be an input/output interface of a chip (for example, a baseband chip), and the processing module 710 may be a processor of the chip system, and may include one or more central processing units.
  • the processing module 710 in the embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a processor or a processor-related circuit component, and the transceiver module 720 may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit component.
  • the processing module 710 may be used to perform all the operations performed by the first terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 except for the receiving and sending operations, such as S32, S36, and S37, and/or to support the descriptions described herein. Other processes of the technology.
  • the transceiver module 720 may be used to perform all the receiving operations performed by the first terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, such as S31, S33 to S35, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the processing module 710 may be used to perform all operations other than the transceiving operations performed by the first terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, such as S507 and S508, and/or to support the technology described herein Other processes.
  • the transceiver module 720 can be used to perform all the receiving operations performed by the first terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, such as S501, S503, S506, and S510, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein .
  • the processing module 710 may be used to perform all operations other than the transceiving operations performed by the first terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, such as S62, S64, S66, and S69, and/or to support the text Other processes of the described technique.
  • the transceiver module 720 can be used to perform all the receiving operations performed by the first terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, such as S61, S63, S65, S67, and S68, and/or for supporting the technology described herein Other processes.
  • the transceiver module 720 may be a functional module that can perform both sending and receiving operations.
  • the transceiver module 720 may be used to execute the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, or the diagram. In the embodiment shown in 6, all the sending and receiving operations performed by the first terminal device.
  • the transceiver module 720 can be considered as the sending module, and when the receiving operation is performed, the transceiver module can be considered 720 is a receiving module; or, the transceiver module 720 can also be two functional modules.
  • the transceiver module can be regarded as a collective term for these two functional modules.
  • the two functional modules are the sending module and the receiving module.
  • the sending module is used to complete the transmission.
  • the sending module can be used to perform all the sending operations performed by the first terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, or the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, and the receiving module is used to complete
  • the receiving operation for example, the receiving module may be used to perform all receiving operations performed by the first terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, or the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the transceiver module 720 is configured to send K2 first reference signals to the second terminal device in K1 directions, and each of the K1 directions is that the first terminal device 700 sends to the second terminal device.
  • the direction of the data signal, one of the K2 first reference signals is used to detect whether the beam in the direction of the one first reference signal fails, K1 and K2 are both positive integers, and K2 is greater than or Equal to K1;
  • the transceiver module 720 is further configured to send P2 second reference signals to the second terminal device in the P1 direction, and one second reference signal in the P2 second reference signals is used to measure the one first reference signal.
  • the P1 directions are part of or all of the transmission directions supported by the first terminal device 700, P1 is a positive integer, and P2 is an integer greater than or equal to P1;
  • the transceiver module 720 is further configured to receive the measurement result of the P2 second reference signals from the second terminal device;
  • the processing module 710 is further configured to determine whether the P1 beams corresponding to the P1 directions are available according to the measurement results of the P2 second reference signals.
  • the transceiver module 720 is further configured to send a second message to the second terminal device, where the second message is used to indicate available beams in the P1 beams, or indicate that none of the P1 beams are available; or,
  • the processing module 710 is further configured to recover one or more of the P1 beams through the RRC layer of the first terminal device 700.
  • the transceiver module 720 is further configured to send M2 third reference signals to the second terminal device in M1 directions, and one third reference signal in the M2 third reference signals is used to detect the one third reference signal. Whether the beam in the direction of the reference signal can be used to restore the communication connection, M1 is a positive integer, and M2 is an integer greater than or equal to M1;
  • the processing module 710 is further configured to determine that, for N2 consecutive times, none of the beams in the M1 directions can be used to restore the communication connection, and N2 is a positive integer.
  • the processing module is configured to determine that all beams in the K1 directions fail for N1 consecutive times, and to determine that all beams in the M1 directions fail for N2 consecutive times. Is used to restore the communication connection:
  • the BFRR indicates that N1 consecutive times, the beams in the K1 directions have failed, and N2 consecutive times, the beams in the M1 directions cannot be Used to restore the communication connection.
  • the transceiver module 720 is further configured to send a second response message to the second terminal device, where the second response message is a response message of the BFRR.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device 800 provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • the communication device 800 is, for example, the second terminal device 800.
  • the second terminal device 800 includes a processing module 810 and a transceiver module 820.
  • the second terminal device 800 may be a terminal device, or may be a chip applied in the terminal device or other combination devices or components with terminal device functions.
  • the transceiver module 820 may be a transceiver, the transceiver may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc.
  • the processing module 810 may be a processor, and the processor may include one or more CPUs.
  • the transceiver module 820 may be a radio frequency unit
  • the processing module 810 may be a processor, such as a baseband processor.
  • the transceiver module 820 may be an input/output interface of a chip (such as a baseband chip), and the processing module 810 may be a processor of the chip system, and may include one or more central processing units. It should be understood that the processing module 810 in the embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a processor or a processor-related circuit component, and the transceiver module 820 may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit component.
  • the processing module 810 can be used to perform all the operations performed by the second terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 except for receiving and sending operations, such as measuring P2 second reference signals, etc., and/or using To support other processes of the technology described in this article.
  • the transceiver module 820 may be used to perform all the receiving operations performed by the second terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, such as S31, S33 to S35, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the processing module 810 may be used to perform all operations other than the transceiving operations performed by the second terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, such as S502, S504, and S509, and/or to support the operations described herein.
  • Other processes of the technology can be used to perform all the receiving operations performed by the second terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, such as S501, S503, S506, and S510, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein .
  • the processing module 810 may be used to perform all operations other than the transceiving operations performed by the second terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, such as S62, S64, S66, and S69, and/or to support the text Other processes of the described technique.
  • the transceiver module 820 can be used to perform all the receiving operations performed by the second terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, such as S61, S63, S65, S67, and S68, and/or for supporting the technology described herein Other processes.
  • the transceiver module 820 can be a functional module that can complete both sending and receiving operations.
  • the transceiver module 820 can be used to execute the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, or the diagram. All the sending and receiving operations performed by the second terminal device in the embodiment shown in 6, for example, when the sending operation is performed, the transceiver module 820 can be considered as the sending module, and when the receiving operation is performed, the transceiver module can be considered 820 is a receiving module; alternatively, the transceiver module 820 can also be two functional modules.
  • the transceiver module can be regarded as a collective term for these two functional modules.
  • the two functional modules are the sending module and the receiving module.
  • the sending module is used to complete the transmission.
  • the sending module can be used to perform all the sending operations performed by the second terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, or the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, and the receiving module is used to complete
  • the receiving operation for example, the receiving module may be used to perform all the receiving operations performed by the second terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, or the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the transceiver module 820 is configured to receive K2 first reference signals in K1 directions corresponding to the first terminal device, and each of the K1 directions is from the first terminal device to the second terminal device. 800 The direction in which the data signal is sent, one of the K2 first reference signals is used to detect whether the beam in the direction of the one first reference signal fails, K1 is a positive integer, and K2 is greater than or equal to K1 integer;
  • the transceiver module 820 is further configured to send a first message or BFRR to the first terminal device, where the first message is used to indicate the measurement result of the K2 first reference signals by the second terminal device 800, and the BFRR It is used to indicate that the beams in the K1 directions have failed for N1 consecutive times;
  • the transceiver module 820 is further configured to receive P2 second reference signals in the P1 direction corresponding to the first terminal device, and one of the P2 second reference signals is used to measure the one The quality of the beam in the direction where the second reference signal is located, the P1 directions are all or part of the transmission directions supported by the first terminal device, P1 is a positive integer, and P2 is an integer greater than or equal to P1;
  • the processing module 810 is configured to measure the P2 second reference signals
  • the transceiver module 820 is further configured to send the measurement result of the P2 second reference signal to the first terminal device, and the measurement result of the P2 second reference signal is used to determine whether the P1 beams are available Beam.
  • the transceiver module 820 is further configured to receive a second message from the first terminal device, where the second message is used to indicate available beams in the P1 beams, or indicate that none of the P1 beams are available; or ,
  • the processing module 810 is further configured to determine that none of the P1 beams are available when it is determined that the transceiver module 820 has not received the second message from the first terminal device.
  • the transceiver module 820 is further configured to recover one or more of the P1 beams through the RRC layer of the second terminal device 800.
  • the transceiver module 820 is further configured to receive M2 third reference signals from the first terminal device in M1 directions, and the third reference signals are used to detect the signals in the corresponding direction. Whether the beam can be used to restore the communication connection, M1 is a positive integer, and M2 is an integer greater than or equal to M1.
  • the transceiver module 820 is further configured to send a fourth message or the BFRR to the first terminal device, and the fourth message is used to instruct the second terminal device 800 to respond to the M2
  • the BFRR is also used to indicate that for N2 consecutive times, none of the beams in the M1 directions can be used to restore the communication connection.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device 900 according to an embodiment of the application.
  • the communication device 900 is, for example, the first terminal device 900.
  • the first terminal device 900 includes a processing module 910 and a transceiver module 920.
  • the first terminal device 900 may be a terminal device, or may be a chip applied to the terminal device or other combination devices, components, etc. having terminal device functions.
  • the transceiver module 920 may be a transceiver
  • the transceiver may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc.
  • the processing module 910 may be a processor, such as a baseband processor.
  • the baseband processor may include one or Multiple CPUs.
  • the transceiver module 920 may be a radio frequency unit, and the processing module 910 may be a processor, such as a baseband processor.
  • the transceiver module 920 may be an input/output interface of a chip (such as a baseband chip), and the processing module 910 may be a processor of the chip system, and may include one or more central processing units.
  • the processing module 910 in the embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a processor or a processor-related circuit component, and the transceiver module 920 may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit component.
  • the processing module 910 can be used to perform all operations other than the transceiving operation performed by the first terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, such as S44 and S47, and/or to support the technology described herein Other processes.
  • the transceiver module 920 may be used to perform all the receiving operations performed by the first terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, such as S41, S43, S45, and S49, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein .
  • the transceiver module 920 may be a functional module that can perform both sending and receiving operations.
  • the transceiver module 920 may be used to perform all the operations performed by the first terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 Sending operation and receiving operation, for example, when performing a sending operation, the transceiver module 920 can be considered as a sending module, and when performing a receiving operation, the transceiver module 920 can be considered as a receiving module; or, the transceiver module 920 can also have two functions Module, the transceiver module can be regarded as the collective name of these two functional modules.
  • the two functional modules are the sending module and the receiving module.
  • the sending module is used to complete the sending operation.
  • the sending module can be used to implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 4
  • the receiving module is used to complete the receiving operation.
  • the receiving module may be used to perform all the receiving operations performed by the first terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4.
  • the transceiver module 920 is configured to send K2 first reference signals to the second terminal device in K1 transmission directions, and each of the K1 directions is the first terminal device 900 to the second terminal device.
  • the direction in which the data signal is sent, one of the K2 first reference signals is used to detect whether the beam in the sending direction where the one first reference signal is located fails, K1 and K2 are both positive integers, and K2 Greater than or equal to K1;
  • the transceiver module 920 is further configured to receive P2 second reference signals from the second terminal device in P3 receiving directions, where the P3 receiving directions correspond to the P1 sending directions of the first terminal device 900, and the One of the P2 second reference signals is used to measure the beam quality in the receiving direction of the first terminal device 900 where the one second reference signal is located, and the beam in the receiving direction of the first terminal device 900
  • the quality corresponding to the beam quality in one transmission direction of the first terminal device 900, the P1 transmission directions are part of the transmission directions or all transmission directions supported by the first terminal device 900, P1 is a positive integer, and P2 is greater than or An integer equal to P3;
  • the processing module 910 is further configured to determine whether the P1 beams corresponding to the P1 transmission directions are available according to the measurement result of the P2 second reference signals.
  • the transceiver module 920 is further configured to send a first response message to the second terminal device, where the first response message is used to indicate available beams in the P1 beams, or used to indicate that none of the P1 beams are available Use; or,
  • the processing module 910 is further configured to control the transceiver module 920 not to send the first response message to the second terminal device when it is determined that none of the P1 beams are available.
  • the transceiver module 920 is further configured to send M2 third reference signals to the second terminal device in M1 transmission directions, and one of the M2 third reference signals is a third reference signal.
  • the reference signal is used to detect whether the beam in the sending direction where the third reference signal is located can be used to restore the communication connection, M1 is a positive integer, and M2 is an integer greater than or equal to M1.
  • the processing module 910 is further configured to recover one or more of the P1 beams through the RRC layer of the first terminal device 900.
  • the second terminal device 1000 includes a processing module 1010 and a transceiver module 1020.
  • the second terminal device 900 may be a terminal device, or may be a chip applied in the terminal device or other combination devices, components, etc. having terminal device functions.
  • the transceiver module 1020 may be a transceiver
  • the transceiver may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc.
  • the processing module 1010 may be a processor, such as a baseband processor.
  • the baseband processor may include one or Multiple CPUs.
  • the processing module 1010 can be used to perform all the operations performed by the second terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 except for the transceiving operation, such as S42 and S46, and/or to support the technology described herein Other processes.
  • the transceiver module 1020 may be used to perform all the receiving operations performed by the second terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, such as S41, S43, S45, and S49, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein .
  • the transceiver module 1020 may be a functional module that can perform both sending operations and receiving operations.
  • the transceiver module 1020 may be used to perform all the operations performed by the second terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 Sending and receiving operations.
  • the transceiver module 1020 when performing a sending operation, can be considered as a sending module, and when performing a receiving operation, the transceiver module 1020 can be considered as a receiving module; or, the transceiver module 1020 can also have two functions.
  • Module, transceiver module can be regarded as the collective name of these two functional modules, these two functional modules are sending module and receiving module respectively.
  • the sending module is used to complete the sending operation.
  • the sending module can be used to implement the embodiment shown in Figure 4
  • the receiving module is used to complete the receiving operation.
  • the receiving module may be used to perform all the receiving operations performed by the second terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4.
  • the transceiver module 1020 is configured to receive K2 first reference signals in K1 transmission directions corresponding to the first terminal device, and each of the K1 directions is the direction from the first terminal device to the second terminal.
  • the direction in which the device 1000 transmits the data signal, one of the K2 first reference signals is used to detect whether the beam in the transmission direction where the one first reference signal is failed, K1 is a positive integer, and K2 is An integer greater than or equal to K1;
  • the processing module 1010 is configured to determine that, N1 consecutive times, the beams in the K1 transmission directions have failed, and N1 is a positive integer;
  • the transceiver module 1020 is further configured to send P2 second reference signals to the first terminal device, where the P2 reference signals correspond to the P1 sending directions of the first terminal device, and the P1 sending directions are all Part of the transmission direction or all transmission directions supported by the first terminal device, one second reference signal in the P2 second reference signals is used to measure the receiving direction of the first terminal device where the one second reference signal is located
  • the quality of the beam in the receiving direction of the first terminal device corresponds to the quality of the beam in a transmission direction of the first terminal device, P1 is a positive integer, and P2 is an integer greater than or equal to P3;
  • the processing module 1010 is further configured to determine whether the P1 beams corresponding to the P1 transmission directions are available according to the P2 second reference signals.
  • the processing module 1010 is configured to determine whether the P1 beams corresponding to the P1 transmission directions are available according to the P2 second reference signals in the following manner:
  • the transceiver module 1020 has not received the first response message from the first terminal device, and it is determined that none of the P1 beams are available.
  • the transceiver module 1020 is further configured to receive M2 third reference signals in M1 transmission directions corresponding to the first terminal device, and one third reference signal of the M2 third reference signals is used for detecting the Whether the beam in the sending direction where the third reference signal is located can be used to restore the communication connection, M1 is a positive integer, and M2 is an integer greater than or equal to M1;
  • the processing module 1010 is also used to determine that, N2 consecutive times, none of the beams in the M1 transmission directions can be used to restore the communication connection, and N2 is a positive integer.
  • the processing module 1010 is further configured to recover one or more of the P1 beams through the RRC layer of the second terminal device 1000.
  • FIG. 11 shows a simplified schematic diagram of the structure of the terminal device. It is easy to understand and easy to illustrate.
  • the terminal device uses a mobile phone as an example.
  • the terminal equipment includes a processor, a memory, a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
  • the processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the terminal device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data.
  • the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for the conversion of baseband signal and radio frequency signal and the processing of radio frequency signal.
  • the antenna is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices such as touch screens, display screens, keyboards, etc., are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users. It should be noted that some types of terminal devices may not have input and output devices.
  • the processor When data needs to be sent, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and then outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
  • the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and sends the radio frequency signal to the outside in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna.
  • the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, and the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • FIG. 11 In an actual terminal device product, there may be one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or storage device.
  • the memory may be set independently of the processor, or may be integrated with the processor, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the antenna and radio frequency circuit with transceiving functions can be regarded as the transceiving unit of the terminal device (the transceiving unit can be a functional unit that can realize the sending and receiving functions; or the transceiving unit can also be It includes two functional units, namely a receiving unit capable of realizing the receiving function and a transmitting unit capable of realizing the transmitting function), and the processor with the processing function is regarded as the processing unit of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device includes a transceiver unit 1110 and a processing unit 1120.
  • the transceiving unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiving device, and so on.
  • the processing unit may also be called a processor, a processing board, a processing module, a processing device, and so on.
  • the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 1110 can be regarded as the receiving unit, and the device for implementing the sending function in the transceiver unit 1110 as the sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit 1110 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit.
  • the transceiver unit may sometimes be called a transceiver, a transceiver, or a transceiver circuit.
  • the receiving unit may sometimes be called a receiver, a receiver, or a receiving circuit.
  • the transmitting unit may sometimes be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit.
  • transceiving unit 1110 is used to perform the sending and receiving operations on the first terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment
  • processing unit 1120 is used to perform other operations on the first terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment except for the transceiving operation. .
  • the processing unit 1120 may be used to perform all operations performed by the first terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 except for the transceiving operations, such as S32, S36, and S37, and/ Or other processes used to support the technology described in this article.
  • the transceiver unit 1110 may be used to perform all the receiving operations performed by the first terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, such as S31, S33 to S35, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the processing unit 1120 may be used to perform all operations performed by the first terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 except for the receiving and sending operations, such as S507 and S508, and/or Other processes used to support the technology described in this article.
  • the transceiver unit 1110 may be used to perform all the receiving operations performed by the first terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, such as S501, S503, S506, and S510, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein .
  • the processing unit 1120 may be used to perform all operations performed by the first terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 except for receiving and sending operations, such as S62, S64, S66, and S69. , And/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the transceiver unit 1110 may be used to perform all the receiving operations performed by the first terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, such as S61, S63, S65, S67, and S68, and/or for supporting the technology described herein Other processes.
  • the processing unit 1120 may be used to perform all operations performed by the first terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 except for the receiving and sending operations, such as S44 and S47, and/or Other processes used to support the technology described in this article.
  • the transceiver unit 1110 may be used to perform all the receiving operations performed by the first terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, such as S41, S43, S45, and S49, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein .
  • the transceiving unit 1110 is configured to perform the sending operation and the receiving operation on the second terminal device side in the foregoing method embodiment
  • the processing unit 1120 is configured to perform other operations on the second terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment except for the transceiving operation.
  • the processing unit 1120 may be used to perform all operations performed by the second terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 except for the transceiving operations, such as performing P2 second reference signals. Measurements, etc., and/or other processes used to support the techniques described herein.
  • the transceiver unit 1110 may be used to perform all the receiving operations performed by the second terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, such as S31, S33 to S35, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the processing unit 1120 may be used to perform all operations performed by the second terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 except for the receiving and sending operations, such as S502, S504, and S509, and / Or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the transceiver unit 1110 may be used to perform all the receiving operations performed by the second terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, such as S501, S503, S506, and S510, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein .
  • the processing unit 1120 may be used to perform all operations performed by the second terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 except for receiving and sending operations, such as S62, S64, S66, and S69. , And/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the transceiving unit 1110 may be used to perform all the receiving operations performed by the second terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, such as S61, S63, S65, S67, and S68, and/or for supporting the technology described herein Other processes.
  • the processing unit 1120 may be used to perform all operations performed by the second terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 except for the receiving and sending operations, such as S42 and S46, and/or Other processes used to support the technology described in this article.
  • the transceiver unit 1110 may be used to perform all the receiving operations performed by the second terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, such as S41, S43, S45, and S49, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein .
  • the device may include a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • the transceiving unit may be an input/output circuit and/or a communication interface;
  • the processing unit is an integrated processor or a microprocessor or an integrated circuit.
  • the device shown in FIG. 12 can be referred to.
  • the device can perform functions similar to the processing module 710 in FIG. 7.
  • the device can perform functions similar to the processing module 810 in Fig. 8.
  • the device can perform functions similar to the processing module 910 in FIG. 9.
  • the device can perform functions similar to the processing module 1010 in FIG. 10.
  • the device includes a processor 1210, a data sending processor 1220, and a data receiving processor 1230.
  • the processing module 710 in the foregoing embodiment may be the processor 1210 in FIG. 12 and complete corresponding functions;
  • the transceiving module 720 in the foregoing embodiment may be the sending data processor 1220 in FIG.
  • the processing module 810 in the foregoing embodiment may be the processor 1210 in FIG. 12 and complete corresponding functions; the transceiving module 820 in the foregoing embodiment may be the sending data processor 1220 in FIG. 12, and/or Receive the data processor 1230 and complete the corresponding functions.
  • the processing module 910 in the foregoing embodiment may be the processor 1210 in FIG. 12 and complete corresponding functions; the transceiving module 920 in the foregoing embodiment may be the data sending processor 1220 in FIG. 12, and/or Receive the data processor 1230 and complete the corresponding functions.
  • the processing module 1010 in the foregoing embodiment may be the processor 1210 in FIG.
  • the transceiver module 1020 in the foregoing embodiment may be the sending data processor 1220 in FIG. 12, and/or Receive the data processor 1230 and complete the corresponding functions.
  • the channel encoder and the channel decoder are shown in FIG. 12, it can be understood that these modules do not constitute a restrictive description of this embodiment, and are merely illustrative.
  • the processing device 1300 includes modules such as a modulation subsystem, a central processing subsystem, and a peripheral subsystem.
  • the communication device in this embodiment can be used as the modulation subsystem therein.
  • the modulation subsystem may include a processor 1303 and an interface 1304.
  • the processor 1303 completes the function of the aforementioned processing module 710
  • the interface 1304 completes the function of the aforementioned transceiver module 720.
  • the processor 1303 completes the function of the aforementioned processing module 810
  • the interface 1304 completes the function of the aforementioned transceiver module 820.
  • the processor 1303 completes the function of the aforementioned processing module 910, and the interface 1304 completes the function of the aforementioned transceiver module 920.
  • the processor 1303 completes the function of the aforementioned processing module 1010, and the interface 1304 completes the function of the aforementioned transceiver module 1020.
  • the modulation subsystem includes a memory 1306, a processor 1303, and a program stored in the memory 1306 and running on the processor. When the processor 1303 executes the program, the terminal device side in the above method embodiment is implemented. Methods. It should be noted that the memory 1306 can be non-volatile or volatile, and its location can be located inside the modulation subsystem or in the processing device 1300, as long as the memory 1306 can be connected to the The processor 1303 is fine.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a first communication system.
  • the first communication system may include the first terminal device involved in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 described above, and the second terminal device involved in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 described above.
  • the first communication system may include the first terminal device involved in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 and the second terminal device involved in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 described above.
  • the first communication system may include the first terminal device involved in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 described above, and the second terminal device involved in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 described above.
  • the first terminal device included in the first communication system is, for example, the first terminal device 700 in FIG. 7.
  • the second terminal device included in the first communication system is, for example, the second terminal device 800 in FIG. 8.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a first communication system.
  • the first communication system may include the first terminal device involved in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 described above, and the second terminal device involved in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 described above.
  • the first terminal device included in the second communication system is, for example, the first terminal device 900 in FIG. 9.
  • the second terminal device included in the second communication system is, for example, the second terminal device 1000 in FIG. 10.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 3 provided by the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the process related to the first terminal device in the embodiment is not limited to the embodiment.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 3 provided by the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the process related to the second terminal device in the embodiment is also provided.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores a computer program.
  • the computer program When the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 4 provided by the foregoing method embodiment. The process related to the first terminal device in the embodiment.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores a computer program.
  • the computer program When the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 4 provided by the foregoing method embodiment. The process related to the second terminal device in the embodiment.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 5 provided by the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the process related to the first terminal device in the embodiment is not limited to the embodiment.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 5 provided by the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the process related to the second terminal device in the embodiment is also provided.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 6 provided by the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the process related to the first terminal device in the embodiment is not limited to the embodiment.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 6 provided by the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the process related to the second terminal device in the embodiment is also provided.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 provided by the above method embodiment The process related to the first terminal device.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 provided by the above method embodiment Flow related to the second terminal device.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 provided by the above method embodiment The process related to the first terminal device.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 provided by the above method embodiment Flow related to the second terminal device.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 provided by the above method embodiment The process related to the first terminal device.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 provided by the above method embodiment Flow related to the second terminal device.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 provided by the above method embodiment The process related to the first terminal device.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 provided by the above method embodiment Flow related to the second terminal device.
  • processors mentioned in the embodiments of this application may be a CPU, or other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processors, DSP), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), ready-made Field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the memory mentioned in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electrically available Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • static random access memory static random access memory
  • dynamic RAM dynamic RAM
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • synchronous dynamic random access memory synchronous DRAM, SDRAM
  • double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • synchronous connection dynamic random access memory serial DRAM, SLDRAM
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM, DR RAM
  • the processor is a general-purpose processor, DSP, ASIC, FPGA or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic device, or discrete hardware component
  • the memory storage module
  • the size of the sequence number of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not correspond to the embodiments of the present application.
  • the implementation process constitutes any limitation.
  • the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative, for example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
  • the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disks or optical disks and other media that can store program codes. .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请涉及一种通信方法及装置,可应用于车联网,例如V2X、LTE-V、V2V等,或可用于智能驾驶,智能网联车等领域。第一终端装置在K1个方向上向第二终端装置发送K2个第一参考信号,第一终端装置确定,连续N1次,K1个方向上的波束均失败。第一终端装置在P1个方向上向第二终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号,第一终端装置根据来自第二终端装置的P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,确定P1个方向对应的P1个波束是否可用。可见,本申请实施例提供了在SL通信中进行波束失败检测的机制。另外,本申请实施例可以尽量通过物理层对波束进行恢复,无需通过高层,提高了波束恢复的效率,也减小了因波束失败而导致的业务时延。

Description

一种通信方法及装置 技术领域
本申请涉及移动通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法及装置。
背景技术
在过去的几十年中,无线通信系统经历了从第一代模拟通信到第五代移动通信技术(the 5th generation,5G)新无线电(new radio,NR)的技术演变。在这复杂的演变过程中,各代通信系统对频段使用的变化是一个重要方面。然而,对于前几代无线通信包括第四代移动通信技术(the 4th generation,4G)长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统在内,其频段的变化都被局限在6GHz以下的低频段。受制于有限的频谱和可用的带宽,低频段的通信性能受到严格限制,无法支撑高容量的通信业务。在5G系统中,无线通信将跳出这一限制,定义第二频率范围(frequency range 2,FR2),实现6GHz以上频段的部署和应用。
FR2中的频谱资源丰富,带宽范围大,为需要高容量通信的多种新型业务提供了数据传输通道,如虚拟现实、高清视频传输、车到一切(vehicle-to-everything,V2X)等。特别在V2X方面,FR2的应用将对侧行链路(sidelink,SL)通信产生深远影响,为实现车辆编队(vehicle platooning)、扩展传感器(extended sensor)以及自动驾驶等功能提供关键支撑。然而,SL的PC5接口具有众多NR的Uu接口不具有的特点,由此产生了一些技术问题。例如,在NR系统的Uu口,具有波束失败检测(beam failure detection,BFD)机制,以能够检测波束是否失败,减小业务时延。但在SL通信中,尚且没有BFD机制,无法检测波束是否失败。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法及装置,用于在SL通信中提供波束失败检测机制。
第一方面,提供第一种通信方法,该方法包括:第一终端装置在K1个方向上向第二终端装置发送K2个第一参考信号,所述K1个方向中的每个方向是所述第一终端装置向所述第二终端装置发送数据信号的方向,所述K2个第一参考信号中的一个第一参考信号用于检测所述一个第一参考信号所在方向上的波束是否失败,K1和K2均为正整数,且K2大于或等于K1;所述第一终端装置确定,连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败,N1为正整数;所述第一终端装置在P1个方向上向所述第二终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号,所述P2个第二参考信号中的一个第二参考信号用于测量所述一个第一参考信号所在方向上的波束的质量,所述P1个方向为所述第一终端装置支持的部分发送方向或全部发送方向,P1为正整数,P2为大于或等于P1的整数;所述第一终端装置接收来自所述第二终端装置的所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果;所述第一终端装置根据所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,确定所述P1个方向对应的P1个波束是否可用。
该方法可由第一通信装置执行,第一通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置,例如芯片。示例性地,所述第一通信装置为第一终端装 置。示例性地,所述第一终端装置为终端设备,或者为设置在终端设备中的用于实现终端设备的功能的芯片,或者为用于实现终端设备的功能的其他部件。在下文的介绍过程中,以第一通信装置是第一终端装置为例。
本申请实施例中,第一终端装置可以向第二终端装置发送第一参考信号,从而第一终端装置可以确定K1个方向上的波束是否失败,相当于提供了一种在SL通信中进行波束失败检测的机制。另外,如果第一终端装置确定K1个方向上的波束失败,则第一终端装置还可以在P1个方向上向第二终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号,可以理解为,K1个方向是第一终端装置的服务波束对应的方向,而P1个方向是第一终端装置支持的部分发送方向或全部发送方向,P1个方向所包括的方向的个数可以大于K1个方向所包括的方向的个数,也就是说,如果K1个方向上的波束失败,则第一终端装置可以继续确定更多个方向(即P1个方向)上是否有可用的波束,而P1个方向上有可用波束的可能性会大于K1个方向上有可用波束的可能性,提高了获得可用波束的可能性。通过这种方式,尽量通过物理层确定可用波束,或者说通过物理层对波束进行恢复,无需通过高层来恢复波束,提高了波束恢复的效率,也减小了因波束失败而导致的业务时延。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:
所述第一终端装置向所述第二终端装置发送第二消息,所述第二消息用于指示所述P1个波束中可用的波束,或指示所述P1个波束均不可用;或,
所述第一终端装置确定所述P1个波束均不可用,所述第一终端装置不向所述第二终端装置发送第二消息。
在确定P1个波束是否可用之后,第一终端装置可以向第二终端装置发送第二消息,第二消息用于指示P1个波束中可用的波束,或者指示P1个波束均不可用。第二终端装置接收第二消息后,如果第二消息指示P1个波束中可用的波束,第二终端装置可以根据第二消息确定P1个波束中有哪些波束可用,或者,如果第二消息指示P1个波束均不可用,则第二终端装置根据第二消息可以确定P1个波束均不可用。第二消息如果指示P1个波束中可用的波束,一种方式为,第二消息包括P1个波束中可用的波束的标识,波束的标识例如为波束的ID或者波束的编号等,第二终端装置根据第二消息所包括的波束的标识就可以确定这些标识所对应的波束是可用的波束。通过第二消息,使得指示更为明确。
或者,在确定P1个波束是否可用之后,如果P1个波束中有可用的波束,则第一终端装置可以向第二终端装置发送第二消息,第二消息用于指示P1个波束中可用的波束。第二终端装置接收第二消息后,可以根据第二消息确定P1个波束中有哪些波束可用。而如果P1个波束中没有可用的波束,则第一终端装置可以不向第二终端装置发送第二消息。如果第二终端装置未接收来自第一终端装置的第二消息,也就可以确定P1个波束均不可用。通过这种方式,可以减少第一终端装置发送的消息的数量,节省信令开销。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:
所述第一终端装置通过所述第一终端装置的RRC层恢复所述P1个波束中的一个或多个。
如果第一终端装置确定P1个波束均不可用,则第一终端装置可以告知第一终端装置的高层,第一终端装置的高层可以进行波束恢复。同理,如果第二终端装置确定P1个波束均不可用,则第二终端装置可以告知第二终端装置的高层,第二终端装置的高层可以进行波束恢复。具体的,第二终端装置的高层可以与第一终端装置的高层进行配合,以进行波束 恢复。相当于,如果通过P2个第二参考信号也无法恢复波束,则还可以通过高层来恢复,使得波束恢复的方案更为可靠。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述第一终端装置确定,连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败,包括:
所述第一终端装置接收来自所述第二终端装置的第一消息,所述第一消息用于指示所述第二终端装置对所述K2个第一参考信号的测量结果;
所述第一终端装置根据所述K2个第一参考信号的测量结果,确定连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败。
第二终端装置在接收K2个第一参考信号后,可以对K2个第一参考信号进行测量,并根据测量结果确定K1个波束是否失败。如果确定连续N1次K1个方向上的波束均失败,第二终端装置可以向第一终端装置发送BFRR,第一终端装置可以接收来自第二终端装置的BFRR,BFRR可以指示连续N1次,K1个方向上的波束均失败。第一终端装置只要接收了BFRR,就可以确定连续N1次,K1个方向上的波束均失败。通过BFRR就可以确定是否连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败,无需引入其他的消息,更易于现有技术的方案兼容。
或者,第二终端装置在接收K2个第一参考信号后,可以对K2个第一参考信号进行测量,获得测量结果,第二终端装置可以向第一终端装置发送第一消息,第一消息可以指示第二终端装置对K2个第一参考信号的测量结果。第一终端装置接收来自第二终端装置的第一消息,就可以获得K2个第一参考信号的测量结果。第一终端装置根据测量结果就可以确定是否连续N1次K1个方向上的波束均失败。或者,第二终端装置发送给第一终端装置的第一消息,也可以不是包括K2个第一参考信号的测量结果,而是包括第一指示信息,该第一指示信息可以指示K1个波束中可用的波束,或者指示K1个波束均不可用。第一终端装置接收来自第二终端装置的第一消息,就可以确定K1个波束中可用的波束,或者确定K1个波束均不可用。在这种方式下,第一终端装置和第二终端装置无需交互BFRR,减少了波束检测过程的步骤,进一步提高了波束恢复的效率。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:
所述第一终端装置在M1个方向上向所述第二终端装置发送M2个第三参考信号,所述M2个第三参考信号中的一个第三参考信号用于检测所述一个第三参考信号所在方向上的波束是否可被用来恢复通信连接,M1为正整数,M2为大于或等于M1的整数;
所述第一终端装置确定,连续N2次,所述M1个方向上的波束均不可被用来恢复通信连接,N2为正整数。
M1个方向,可以对应于M1个波束,或者说对应于M1个发送波束。M1个波束,可以是第一终端装置的候选波束。例如M1个波束是第一终端装置的全部候选波束,或者是第一终端装置的部分候选波束。也就是说,如果第一终端装置确定K1个方向上的波束均失败,那么还可以通过候选波束再发送第三参考信号,以确定能否通过M1个方向上的波束恢复通信连接。如果能够通过M1个方向上的波束恢复通信连接,那么第一终端装置可以不必再发送P2个第二参考信号。而如果不能通过M1个方向上的波束恢复通信连接,那么第一终端装置可以再发送P2个第二参考信号。相当于,在尝试各种方式之后还不能恢复通信连接,就可以采用本申请实施例提供的方式,发送P2个第二参考信号。通过这种方式,可以使得本申请实施例的方案能够与现有技术兼容。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述第一终端装置确定,连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败,以及确定,连续N2次,所述M1个方向上的波束均不可被用来恢复通信连接,包括:
所述第一终端装置接收来自所述第二终端装置的BFRR,所述BFRR指示连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败,以及连续N2次,所述M1个方向上的波束均不可被用来恢复通信连接。
如果第二终端装置确定连续N1次,K1个方向上的波束均失败,以及连续N2次,M1个方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接,第二终端装置可以向第一终端装置发送BFRR,第一终端装置可以接收来自第二终端装置的BFRR。在这种情况下,BFRR可以指示连续N1次,K1个方向上的波束均失败,以及指示,连续N2次,M1个方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接。第一终端装置只要接收了BFRR,就可以确定连续N1次,K1个方向上的波束均失败,以及确定,连续N2次,M1个方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接。在这种情况下,第二终端装置只需向第一终端装置发送BFRR,就能指示多种信息,有助于减少第二终端装置向第一终端装置所发送的消息的数量,节省信令开销。且通过BFRR指示多种信息,也能提高对BFRR的利用率。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:
所述第一终端装置向所述第二终端装置发送第二响应消息,所述第二响应消息为所述BFRR的响应消息。
第一终端装置在接收来自第二终端装置的BFRR后,可以向第二终端装置发送BFRR的响应消息,以使得第二终端装置明确第一终端装置接收了BFRR。这使得第一终端装置和第二终端装置之间的通信过程更为可靠。
第二方面,提供第二种通信方法,该方法包括:第二终端装置接收来自第一终端装置对应的K1个方向上的K2个第一参考信号,所述K1个方向中的每个方向是所述第一终端装置向所述第二终端装置发送数据信号的方向,所述K2个第一参考信号中的一个第一参考信号用于检测所述一个第一参考信号所在方向上的波束是否失败,K1为正整数,K2为大于或等于K1的整数;所述第二终端装置向所述第一终端装置发送第一消息或BFRR,所述第一消息用于指示所述第二终端装置对所述K2个第一参考信号的测量结果,所述BFRR用于指示连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败;所述第二终端装置接收来自所述第一终端装置对应的P1个方向上的P2个第二参考信号,所述P2个第二参考信号中的一个第二参考信号用于测量所述一个第二参考信号所在方向上的波束的质量,所述P1个方向为所述第一终端装置支持的全部发送方向或部分发送方向,P1为正整数,P2为大于或等于P1的整数;所述第二终端装置对所述P2个第二参考信号进行测量;所述第二终端装置向所述第一终端装置发送所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果用于确定所述P1个波束中是否有可用的波束。
该方法可由第二通信装置执行,第二通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置,例如芯片。示例性地,所述第二通信装置为第二终端装置。示例性地,所述第二终端装置为终端设备,或者为设置在终端设备中的用于实现终端设备的功能的芯片,或者为用于实现终端设备的功能的其他部件。在下文的介绍过程中,以第二通信装置是第二终端装置为例。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:
所述第二终端装置接收来自所述第一终端装置的第二消息,所述第二消息用于指示所述P1个波束中可用的波束,或指示所述P1个波束均不可用;或,
所述第二终端装置未接收来自所述第一终端装置的第二消息,所述第二终端装置确定所述P1个波束均不可用。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:
所述第二终端装置通过所述第二终端装置的RRC层恢复所述P1个波束中的一个或多个。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:
所述第二终端装置在M1个方向上接收来自所述第一终端装置的M2个第三参考信号,所述第三参考信号用于检测对应方向上的波束是否可被用来恢复通信连接,M1为正整数,M2为大于或等于M1的整数。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:
所述第二终端装置向所述第一终端装置发送第四消息或所述BFRR,所述第四消息用于指示所述第二终端装置对所述M2个第三参考信号的测量结果,所述BFRR还用于指示,连续N2次,所述M1个方向上的波束均不可被用来恢复通信连接。
关于第二方面或各种可选的实施方式的技术效果,可参考对于第一方面或相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第三方面,提供第三种通信方法,该方法包括:第一终端装置在K1个发送方向上向第二终端装置发送K2个第一参考信号,所述K1个方向中的每个方向是所述第一终端装置向所述第二终端装置发送数据信号的方向,所述K2个第一参考信号中的一个第一参考信号用于检测所述一个第一参考信号所在的发送方向上的波束是否失败,K1和K2均为正整数,K2大于或等于K1;所述第一终端装置在P3个接收方向上接收来自所述第二终端装置的P2个第二参考信号,所述P3个接收方向对应于所述第一终端装置的P1个发送方向,所述P2个第二参考信号中的一个第二参考信号用于测量所述一个第二参考信号所在的第一终端装置的接收方向上的波束的质量,所述第一终端装置的接收方向上的波束的质量对应于第一终端装置的一个发送方向上的波束的质量,所述P1个发送方向为所述第一终端装置支持的部分发送方向或全部发送方向,P1为正整数,P2为大于或等于P3的整数;所述第一终端装置对所述P2个第二参考信号进行测量;所述第一终端装置根据所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,确定所述P1个发送方向对应的P1个波束是否可用。
该方法可由第三通信装置执行,第三通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置,例如芯片。示例性地,所述第三通信装置为第一终端装置。示例性地,所述第一终端装置为终端设备,或者为设置在终端设备中的用于实现终端设备的功能的芯片,或者为用于实现终端设备的功能的其他部件。在下文的介绍过程中,以第三通信装置是第一终端装置为例。
在本申请实施例中,第一终端装置可以向第二终端装置发送第一参考信号,从而第一终端装置可以确定K1个发送方向上的波束是否失败,相当于提供了一种在SL通信中进行波束失败检测的机制。另外,如果第二终端装置确定K1个发送方向上的波束失败,则第二终端装置还可以向第一终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号,第一终端装置在P3个接收方向上接收来自第二终端装置的P2个第二参考信号,可以理解为,K1个发送方向是第一终端装置的服务波束对应的方向,而P3个接收方向是第一终端装置支持的所有接收方向中 的部分或全部。对于第一终端装置来说,可以支持一个或多个波束对应关系,每个波束对应关系包括一个发送波束和一个接收波束,每个波束对应关系所指示的发送波束和接收波束是一一对应的,因此P3个接收波束可以对应于第一终端装置的P1个发送波束,那么,P3个接收方向对应于第一终端装置的P1个发送方向。P1个发送方向所包括的方向的个数可以大于K1个发送方向所包括的方向的个数,也就是说,如果K1个发送方向上的波束失败,则第一终端装置可以继续确定更多个方向(即P1个发送方向)上是否有可用的波束,而P1个发送方向上有可用波束的可能性会大于K1个发送方向上有可用波束的可能性,提高了获得可用波束的可能性。通过这种方式,尽量通过物理层确定可用波束,或者说通过物理层对波束进行恢复,无需通过高层来恢复波束,提高了波束恢复的效率,也减小了因波束失败而导致的业务时延。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:
所述第一终端装置向所述第二终端装置发送第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息用于指示所述P1个波束中可用的波束,或用于指示所述P1个波束均不可用;或,
所述第一终端装置确定所述P1个波束均不可用,所述第一终端装置不向所述第二终端装置发送第一响应消息。
在确定P1个波束是否可用之后,第一终端装置可以向第二终端装置发送第一响应消息,第一响应消息用于指示P1个波束中可用的波束,或者指示P1个波束均不可用。第二终端装置接收第一响应消息后,如果第一响应消息指示P1个波束中可用的波束,第二终端装置可以根据第一响应消息确定P1个波束中有哪些波束可用,或者,如果第一响应消息指示P1个波束均不可用,则第二终端装置根据第一响应消息可以确定P1个波束均不可用。通过第一响应消息进行指示,可以使得指示更为明确。
或者,在确定P1个波束是否可用之后,如果P1个波束中有可用的波束,则第一终端装置可以向第二终端装置发送第一响应消息,第一响应消息用于指示P1个波束中可用的波束。第二终端装置接收第一响应消息后,可以根据第一响应消息确定P1个波束中有哪些波束可用。而如果P1个波束中没有可用的波束,则第一终端装置可以不向第二终端装置发送第一响应消息。如果第二终端装置未接收来自第一终端装置的第一响应消息,也就可以确定P1个波束均不可用。通过这种方式可以减少第一终端装置向第二终端装置发送的消息的数量,节省信令开销。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:
所述第一终端装置在M1个发送方向上向所述第二终端装置发送M2个第三参考信号,所述M2个第三参考信号中的一个第三参考信号用于检测所述一个第三参考信号所在的发送方向上的波束是否可被用来恢复通信连接,M1为正整数,M2为大于或等于M1的整数。
M1个方向,可以对应于M1个波束,或者说对应于M1个发送波束。M1个波束,可以是第一终端装置的候选波束。例如M1个波束是第一终端装置的全部候选波束,或者是第一终端装置的部分候选波束。也就是说,如果第一终端装置确定K1个方向上的波束均失败,那么还可以通过候选波束再发送第三参考信号,以确定能否通过M1个方向上的波束恢复通信连接。如果能够通过M1个方向上的波束恢复通信连接,那么第一终端装置可以不必再发送P2个第二参考信号。而如果不能通过M1个方向上的波束恢复通信连接,那么第一终端装置可以再发送P2个第二参考信号。相当于,在尝试各种方式之后还不能恢复通信连接,就可以采用本申请实施例提供的方式,发送P2个第二参考信号。通过这种方式,可以使得本 申请实施例的方案能够与现有技术兼容。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:
所述第一终端装置通过所述第一终端装置的RRC层恢复所述P1个波束中的一个或多个。
如果第一终端装置确定P1个波束均不可用,则第一终端装置可以告知第一终端装置的高层,第一终端装置的高层可以进行波束恢复。同理,如果第二终端装置确定P1个波束均不可用,则第二终端装置可以告知第二终端装置的高层,第二终端装置的高层可以进行波束恢复。具体的,第二终端装置的高层可以与第一终端装置的高层进行配合,以进行波束恢复。相当于,如果通过P2个第二参考信号也无法恢复波束,则还可以通过高层来恢复,使得波束恢复的方案更为可靠。
第四方面,提供第四种通信方法,该方法包括:第二终端装置接收来自第一终端装置对应的K1个发送方向上的K2个第一参考信号,所述K1个方向中的每个方向是所述第一终端装置向所述第二终端装置发送数据信号的方向,所述K2个第一参考信号中的一个第一参考信号用于检测所述一个第一参考信号所在的发送方向上的波束是否失败,K1为正整数,K2为大于或等于K1的整数;所述第二终端装置确定,连续N1次,所述K1个发送方向上的波束均失败,N1为正整数;所述第二终端装置向所述第一终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号,所述P2个参考信号对应于所述第一终端装置的P1个发送方向,所述P1个发送方向为所述第一终端装置支持的部分发送方向或全部发送方向,所述P2个第二参考信号中的一个第二参考信号用于测量所述一个第二参考信号所在的第一终端装置的接收方向上的波束的质量,所述第一终端装置的接收方向上的波束的质量对应于第一终端装置的一个发送方向上的波束的质量,P1为正整数,P2为大于或等于P3的整数;所述第二终端装置根据所述P2个第二参考信号,确定所述P1个发送方向对应的P1个波束是否可用。
该方法可由第四通信装置执行,第四通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置,例如芯片。示例性地,所述第四通信装置为第二终端装置。示例性地,所述第二终端装置为终端设备,或者为设置在终端设备中的用于实现终端设备的功能的芯片,或者为用于实现终端设备的功能的其他部件。在下文的介绍过程中,以第四通信装置是第二终端装置为例。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述第二终端装置根据所述P2个第二参考信号,确定所述P1个发送方向对应的P1个波束是否可用,包括:
所述第二终端装置接收来自所述第一终端装置的第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息用于指示所述P1个波束中可用的波束,或用于指示所述P1个波束均不可用;或,
所述第二终端装置未接收来自所述第一终端装置的第一响应消息,所述第二终端装置确定所述P1个波束均不可用。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:
所述第二终端装置接收来自所述第一终端装置对应的M1个发送方向上的M2个第三参考信号,所述M2个第三参考信号中的一个第三参考信号用于检测所述一个第三参考信号所在的发送方向上的波束是否可被用来恢复通信连接,M1为正整数,M2为大于或等于M1的整数;
所述第二终端装置确定,连续N2次,所述M1个发送方向上的波束均不可被用来恢复通信连接,N2为正整数。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:
所述第二终端装置通过所述第二终端装置的RRC层恢复所述P1个波束中的一个或多个。
关于第四方面或各种可选的实施方式的技术效果,可参考对于第三方面或相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第五方面,提供一种通信装置,例如该通信装置为如前所述的第一通信装置。所述第一通信装置用于执行上述第一方面或任一可能的实施方式中的方法。具体地,所述第一通信装置可以包括用于执行第一方面或任一可能的实施方式中的方法的模块,例如包括处理模块和收发模块。示例性地,收发模块可以包括发送模块和接收模块,发送模块和接收模块可以是不同的功能模块,或者也可以是同一个功能模块,但能够实现不同的功能。示例性地,所述第一通信装置为第一终端装置。示例性地,所述第一终端装置为通信设备,或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性地,所述通信设备为终端设备。下面以第一通信装置是第一终端装置为例。例如,所述收发模块也可以通过收发器实现,所述处理模块也可以通过处理器实现。或者,发送模块可以通过发送器实现,接收模块可以通过接收器实现,发送器和接收器可以是不同的功能模块,或者也可以是同一个功能模块,但能够实现不同的功能。如果第一终端装置为通信设备,收发器例如通过通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者,如果第一终端装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片,那么收发器(或,发送器和接收器)例如为芯片中的通信接口,该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接,以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。在第五方面的介绍过程中,继续以所述第一通信装置是第一终端装置,以及,以所述处理模块和所述收发模块为例进行介绍。其中,
所述收发模块,用于在K1个方向上向第二终端装置发送K2个第一参考信号,所述K1个方向中的每个方向是所述第一终端装置向所述第二终端装置发送数据信号的方向,所述K2个第一参考信号中的一个第一参考信号用于检测所述一个第一参考信号所在方向上的波束是否失败,K1和K2均为正整数,且K2大于或等于K1;
所述处理模块,用于确定,连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败,N1为正整数;
所述收发模块,还用于在P1个方向上向所述第二终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号,所述P2个第二参考信号中的一个第二参考信号用于测量所述一个第一参考信号所在方向上的波束的质量,所述P1个方向为所述第一终端装置支持的部分发送方向或全部发送方向,P1为正整数,P2为大于或等于P1的整数;
所述收发模块,还用于接收来自所述第二终端装置的所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果;
所述处理模块,还用于根据所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,确定所述P1个方向对应的P1个波束是否可用。
在一种可选的实施方式中,
所述收发模块,还用于向所述第二终端装置发送第二消息,所述第二消息用于指示所述P1个波束中可用的波束,或指示所述P1个波束均不可用;或,
所述处理模块还用于在确定所述P1个波束均不可用时,控制所述收发模块不向所述第二终端装置发送第二消息。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述处理模块,还用于通过所述第一终端装置的RRC层恢复所述P1个波束中的一个或多个。
所述处理模块用于通过如下方式确定,连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败:
通过所述收发模块接收来自所述第二终端装置的第一消息,所述第一消息用于指示所述第二终端装置对所述K2个第一参考信号的测量结果;
根据所述K2个第一参考信号的测量结果,确定连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败。
在一种可选的实施方式中,
所述收发模块,还用于在M1个方向上向所述第二终端装置发送M2个第三参考信号,所述M2个第三参考信号中的一个第三参考信号用于检测所述一个第三参考信号所在方向上的波束是否可被用来恢复通信连接,M1为正整数,M2为大于或等于M1的整数;
所述处理模块,还用于确定,连续N2次,所述M1个方向上的波束均不可被用来恢复通信连接,N2为正整数。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述处理模块用于通过如下方式确定,连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败,以及确定,连续N2次,所述M1个方向上的波束均不可被用来恢复通信连接:
通过所述收发模块接收来自所述第二终端装置的BFRR,所述BFRR指示连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败,以及连续N2次,所述M1个方向上的波束均不可被用来恢复通信连接。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述收发模块,还用于向所述第二终端装置发送第二响应消息,所述第二响应消息为所述BFRR的响应消息。
关于第五方面或各种可选的实施方式的技术效果,可参考对于第一方面或相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第六方面,提供一种通信装置,例如该通信装置为如前所述的第二通信装置。所述第二通信装置用于执行上述第二方面或任一可能的实施方式中的方法。具体地,所述第二通信装置可以包括用于执行第二方面或任一可能的实施方式中的方法的模块,例如包括处理模块和收发模块。示例性地,收发模块可以包括发送模块和接收模块,发送模块和接收模块可以是不同的功能模块,或者也可以是同一个功能模块,但能够实现不同的功能。示例性地,所述第二通信装置为第二终端装置。示例性地,所述第二终端装置为通信设备,或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性地,所述通信设备为终端设备。下面以第二通信装置是第二终端装置为例。例如,所述收发模块也可以通过收发器实现,所述处理模块也可以通过处理器实现。或者,发送模块可以通过发送器实现,接收模块可以通过接收器实现,发送器和接收器可以是不同的功能模块,或者也可以是同一个功能模块,但能够实现不同的功能。如果第二终端装置为通信设备,收发器例如通过通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者,如果第二终端装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片,那么收发器(或,发送器和接收器)例如为芯片中的通信接口,该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接,以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。在第六方面的介绍过程中,继续以所述第二通信装置是第二终端装置,以及,以所述处理模块和所述收发模块为例进行介绍。其中,
所述收发模块,用于接收来自第一终端装置对应的K1个方向上的K2个第一参考信号, 所述K1个方向中的每个方向是所述第一终端装置向所述第二终端装置发送数据信号的方向,所述K2个第一参考信号中的一个第一参考信号用于检测所述一个第一参考信号所在方向上的波束是否失败,K1为正整数,K2为大于或等于K1的整数;
所述第二终端装置向所述第一终端装置发送第一消息或BFRR,所述第一消息用于指示所述第二终端装置对所述K2个第一参考信号的测量结果,所述BFRR用于指示连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败;
所述收发模块,还用于接收来自所述第一终端装置对应的P1个方向上的P2个第二参考信号,所述P2个第二参考信号中的一个第二参考信号用于测量所述一个第二参考信号所在方向上的波束的质量,所述P1个方向为所述第一终端装置支持的全部发送方向或部分发送方向,P1为正整数,P2为大于或等于P1的整数;
所述处理模块,用于对所述P2个第二参考信号进行测量;
所述收发模块,还用于向所述第一终端装置发送所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果用于确定所述P1个波束中是否有可用的波束。
在一种可选的实施方式中,
所述收发模块,还用于接收来自所述第一终端装置的第二消息,所述第二消息用于指示所述P1个波束中可用的波束,或指示所述P1个波束均不可用;或,
所述处理模块,还用于在确定所述收发模块未接收来自所述第一终端装置的第二消息时,确定所述P1个波束均不可用。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述处理模块,还用于通过所述第二终端装置的RRC层恢复所述P1个波束中的一个或多个。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述收发模块,还用于在M1个方向上接收来自所述第一终端装置的M2个第三参考信号,所述第三参考信号用于检测对应方向上的波束是否可被用来恢复通信连接,M1为正整数,M2为大于或等于M1的整数。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述收发模块,还用于向所述第一终端装置发送第四消息或所述BFRR,所述第四消息用于指示所述第二终端装置对所述M2个第三参考信号的测量结果,所述BFRR还用于指示,连续N2次,所述M1个方向上的波束均不可被用来恢复通信连接。
关于第六方面或各种可选的实施方式的技术效果,可参考对于第三方面或相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第七方面,提供一种通信装置,例如该通信装置为如前所述的第三通信装置。所述第三通信装置用于执行上述第三方面或任一可能的实施方式中的方法。具体地,所述第三通信装置可以包括用于执行第三方面或任一可能的实施方式中的方法的模块,例如包括处理模块和收发模块。示例性地,收发模块可以包括发送模块和接收模块,发送模块和接收模块可以是不同的功能模块,或者也可以是同一个功能模块,但能够实现不同的功能。示例性地,所述第三通信装置为第一终端装置。示例性地,所述第一终端装置为通信设备,或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性地,所述通信设备为终端设备。下面以第三通信装置是第一终端装置为例。例如,所述收发模块也可以通过收发器实现,所述处理模块也可以通过处理器实现。或者,发送模块可以通过发送器实现,接收模块可以通过接收器实现,发送器和接收器可以是不同的功能模块,或者也可以是同一个功能模块,但能够实现不同的功能。如果第一终端装置为通信设备,收发器例如通过通信设备中的天线、 馈线和编解码器等实现。或者,如果第一终端装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片,那么收发器(或,发送器和接收器)例如为芯片中的通信接口,该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接,以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。在第七方面的介绍过程中,继续以所述第三通信装置是第一终端装置,以及,以所述处理模块和所述收发模块为例进行介绍。其中,
所述收发模块,用于在K1个发送方向上向第二终端装置发送K2个第一参考信号,所述K1个方向中的每个方向是所述第一终端装置向所述第二终端装置发送数据信号的方向,所述K2个第一参考信号中的一个第一参考信号用于检测所述一个第一参考信号所在的发送方向上的波束是否失败,K1和K2均为正整数,K2大于或等于K1;
所述收发模块,还用于在P3个接收方向上接收来自所述第二终端装置的P2个第二参考信号,所述P3个接收方向对应于所述第一终端装置的P1个发送方向,所述P2个第二参考信号中的一个第二参考信号用于测量所述一个第二参考信号所在的第一终端装置的接收方向上的波束的质量,所述第一终端装置的接收方向上的波束的质量对应于第一终端装置的一个发送方向上的波束的质量,所述P1个发送方向为所述第一终端装置支持的部分发送方向或全部发送方向,P1为正整数,P2为大于或等于P3的整数;
所述处理模块,用于对所述P2个第二参考信号进行测量;
所述处理模块,还用于根据所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,确定所述P1个发送方向对应的P1个波束是否可用。
在一种可选的实施方式中,
所述收发模块,还用于向所述第二终端装置发送第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息用于指示所述P1个波束中可用的波束,或用于指示所述P1个波束均不可用;或,
所述处理模块,还用于在确定所述P1个波束均不可用时,控制所述收发模块不向所述第二终端装置发送第一响应消息。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述收发模块,还用于在M1个发送方向上向所述第二终端装置发送M2个第三参考信号,所述M2个第三参考信号中的一个第三参考信号用于检测所述一个第三参考信号所在的发送方向上的波束是否可被用来恢复通信连接,M1为正整数,M2为大于或等于M1的整数。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述处理模块,还用于通过所述第一终端装置的RRC层恢复所述P1个波束中的一个或多个。
关于第七方面或各种可选的实施方式的技术效果,可参考对于第三方面或相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第八方面,提供一种通信装置,例如该通信装置为如前所述的第四通信装置。所述第四通信装置用于执行上述第四方面或任一可能的实施方式中的方法。具体地,所述第四通信装置可以包括用于执行第四方面或任一可能的实施方式中的方法的模块,例如包括处理模块和收发模块。示例性地,收发模块可以包括发送模块和接收模块,发送模块和接收模块可以是不同的功能模块,或者也可以是同一个功能模块,但能够实现不同的功能。示例性地,所述第四通信装置为第二终端装置。示例性地,所述第二终端装置为通信设备,或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性地,所述通信设备为终端设备。下面以第四通信装置是第二终端装置为例。例如,所述收发模块也可以通过收发器实现,所述处理模块也可以通过处理器实现。或者,发送模块可以通过发送器实现,接收模块可以通过 接收器实现,发送器和接收器可以是不同的功能模块,或者也可以是同一个功能模块,但能够实现不同的功能。如果第二终端装置为通信设备,收发器例如通过通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者,如果第二终端装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片,那么收发器(或,发送器和接收器)例如为芯片中的通信接口,该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接,以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。在第八方面的介绍过程中,继续以所述第四通信装置是第二终端装置,以及,以所述处理模块和所述收发模块为例进行介绍。其中,
所述收发模块,用于接收来自第一终端装置对应的K1个发送方向上的K2个第一参考信号,所述K1个方向中的每个方向是所述第一终端装置向所述第二终端装置发送数据信号的方向,所述K2个第一参考信号中的一个第一参考信号用于检测所述一个第一参考信号所在的发送方向上的波束是否失败,K1为正整数,K2为大于或等于K1的整数;
所述处理模块,用于确定,连续N1次,所述K1个发送方向上的波束均失败,N1为正整数;
所述收发模块,还用于向所述第一终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号,所述P2个参考信号对应于所述第一终端装置的P1个发送方向,所述P1个发送方向为所述第一终端装置支持的部分发送方向或全部发送方向,所述P2个第二参考信号中的一个第二参考信号用于测量所述一个第二参考信号所在的第一终端装置的接收方向上的波束的质量,所述第一终端装置的接收方向上的波束的质量对应于第一终端装置的一个发送方向上的波束的质量,P1为正整数,P2为大于或等于P3的整数;
所述处理模块,还用于根据所述P2个第二参考信号,确定所述P1个发送方向对应的P1个波束是否可用。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述处理模块用于通过如下方式根据所述P2个第二参考信号,确定所述P1个发送方向对应的P1个波束是否可用:
通过所述收发模块接收来自所述第一终端装置的第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息用于指示所述P1个波束中可用的波束,或用于指示所述P1个波束均不可用;或,
确定未通过所述收发模块接收来自所述第一终端装置的第一响应消息,确定所述P1个波束均不可用。
在一种可选的实施方式中,
所述收发模块,还用于接收来自所述第一终端装置对应的M1个发送方向上的M2个第三参考信号,所述M2个第三参考信号中的一个第三参考信号用于检测所述一个第三参考信号所在的发送方向上的波束是否可被用来恢复通信连接,M1为正整数,M2为大于或等于M1的整数;
所述处理模块,还用于确定,连续N2次,所述M1个发送方向上的波束均不可被用来恢复通信连接,N2为正整数。
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述处理模块,还用于通过所述第二终端装置的RRC层恢复所述P1个波束中的一个或多个。
关于第八方面或各种可选的实施方式的技术效果,可参考对于第四方面或相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第九方面,提供一种通信装置,该通信装置例如为如前所述的第一通信装置。该通信装置包括处理器。可选的,还可以包括存储器,用于存储计算机指令。处理器和存储器相 互耦合,用于实现上述第一方面或各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。或者,第一通信装置也可以不包括存储器,存储器可以位于第一通信装置外部。可选的,第一通信装置还可以包括通信接口,用于与其他装置或设备进行通信。处理器、存储器和通信接口相互耦合,用于实现上述第一方面或各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。例如,当处理器执行所述存储器存储的计算机指令时,使第一通信装置执行上述第一方面或任意一种可能的实施方式中的方法。示例性地,所述第一通信装置为第一终端装置。示例性地,所述第一终端装置为通信设备,或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性的,所述通信设备为终端设备。
其中,如果第一通信装置为通信设备,通信接口例如通过所述通信设备中的收发器(或者,发送器和接收器)实现,例如所述收发器通过所述通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者,如果第一通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片,那么通信接口例如为芯片的输入/输出接口,例如输入/输出管脚等,该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接,以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。
第十方面,提供一种通信装置,该通信装置例如为如前所述的第二通信装置。该通信装置包括处理器。可选的,还可以包括存储器,用于存储计算机指令。处理器和存储器相互耦合,用于实现上述第二方面或各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。或者,第二通信装置也可以不包括存储器,存储器可以位于第二通信装置外部。可选的,第二通信装置还可以包括通信接口,用于与其他装置或设备进行通信。处理器、存储器和通信接口相互耦合,用于实现上述第二方面或各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。例如,当处理器执行所述存储器存储的计算机指令时,使第二通信装置执行上述第二方面或任意一种可能的实施方式中的方法。示例性地,所述第二通信装置为第二终端装置。示例性地,所述第二终端装置为通信设备,或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性的,所述通信设备为终端设备。
其中,如果第二通信装置为通信设备,通信接口例如通过所述通信设备中的收发器(或者,发送器和接收器)实现,例如所述收发器通过所述通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者,如果第二通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片,那么通信接口例如为芯片的输入/输出接口,例如输入/输出管脚等,该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接,以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。
第十一方面,提供一种通信装置,该通信装置例如为如前所述的第三通信装置。该通信装置包括处理器。可选的,还可以包括存储器,用于存储计算机指令。处理器和存储器相互耦合,用于实现上述第三方面或各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。或者,第三通信装置也可以不包括存储器,存储器可以位于第三通信装置外部。可选的,第三通信装置还可以包括通信接口,用于与其他装置或设备进行通信。处理器、存储器和通信接口相互耦合,用于实现上述第三方面或各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。例如,当处理器执行所述存储器存储的计算机指令时,使第三通信装置执行上述第三方面或任意一种可能的实施方式中的方法。示例性地,所述第三通信装置为第一终端装置。示例性地,所述第一终端装置为通信设备,或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性的,所述通信设备为终端设备。
其中,如果第三通信装置为通信设备,通信接口例如通过所述通信设备中的收发器(或者,发送器和接收器)实现,例如所述收发器通过所述通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码 器等实现。或者,如果第三通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片,那么通信接口例如为芯片的输入/输出接口,例如输入/输出管脚等,该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接,以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。
第十二方面,提供一种通信装置,该通信装置例如为如前所述的第四通信装置。该通信装置包括处理器。可选的,还可以包括存储器,用于存储计算机指令。处理器和存储器相互耦合,用于实现上述第四方面或各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。或者,第四通信装置也可以不包括存储器,存储器可以位于第四通信装置外部。可选的,第四通信装置还可以包括通信接口,用于与其他装置或设备进行通信。处理器、存储器和通信接口相互耦合,用于实现上述第四方面或各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。例如,当处理器执行所述存储器存储的计算机指令时,使第二通信装置执行上述第四方面或任意一种可能的实施方式中的方法。示例性地,所述第四通信装置为第二终端装置。示例性地,所述第二终端装置为通信设备,或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性的,所述通信设备为终端设备。
其中,如果第四通信装置为通信设备,通信接口例如通过所述通信设备中的收发器(或者,发送器和接收器)实现,例如所述收发器通过所述通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者,如果第四通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片,那么通信接口例如为芯片的输入/输出接口,例如输入/输出管脚等,该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接,以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。
第十三方面,提供一种通信系统,该通信系统包括第五方面所述的通信装置或第九方面所述的通信装置,以及,包括第六方面所述的通信装置或第十方面所述的通信装置。
第十四方面,提供一种通信系统,该通信系统包括第七方面所述的通信装置或第十一方面所述的通信装置,以及,包括第八方面所述的通信装置或第十二方面所述的通信装置。
第十五方面,提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行上述第一方面或任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第十六方面,提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行上述第二方面或任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
十七方面,提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行上述第三方面或任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第十八方面,提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行上述第四方面或任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第十九方面,提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行上述第一方面或的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第二十方面,提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行上述第二方面或的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第二十一方面,提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行上述第三方面或的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第二十二方面,提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行上述第四方面或的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
本申请实施例中提供了一种在SL通信中进行波束失败检测的机制。另外,本申请实施例可以尽量通过物理层确定可用波束,或者说通过物理层对波束进行恢复,无需通过高层来恢复波束,提高了波束恢复的效率,也减小了因波束失败而导致的业务时延。
附图说明
图1为V2X的几种示意图;
图2为本申请实施例的一种应用场景示意图;
图3为本申请实施例提供的第一种通信方法的流程图;
图4为本申请实施例提供的第二种通信方法的流程图;
图5为本申请实施例提供的第三种通信方法的流程图;
图6为本申请实施例提供的第四种通信方法的流程图;
图7为本申请实施例提供的第一种第一终端装置的示意性框图;
图8为本申请实施例提供的第一种第二终端装置的示意性框图;
图9为本申请实施例提供的第二种第一终端装置的示意性框图;
图10为本申请实施例提供的第二种第二终端装置的示意性框图;
图11为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图;
图12为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的另一示意性框图;
图13为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的再一示意性框图。
具体实施方式
为了使本申请实施例的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚,下面将结合附图对本申请实施例作进一步地详细描述。
以下,对本申请实施例中的部分用语进行解释说明,以便于本领域技术人员理解。
1)终端设备,可以包括向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备,具体的,包括向用户提供语音的设备,或包括向用户提供数据连通性的设备,或包括向用户提供语音和数据连通性的设备。例如可以包括具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、或连接到无线调制解调器的处理设备。该终端设备可以经无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)与核心网进行通信,与RAN交换语音或数据,或与RAN交互语音和数据。该终端设备可以包括用户设备(user equipment,UE)、无线终端设备、移动终端设备、设备到设备通信(device-to-device,D2D)终端设备、车到一切(vehicle to everything,V2X)终端设备、机器到机器/机器类通信(machine-to-machine/machine-type communications,M2M/MTC)终端设备、物联网(internet of things,IoT)终端设备、订户单元(subscriber unit)、订户站(subscriber station), 移动站(mobile station)、远程站(remote station)、接入点(access point,AP)、远程终端(remote terminal)、接入终端(access terminal)、用户终端(user terminal)、用户代理(user agent)、或用户装备(user device)等。例如,可以包括移动电话(或称为“蜂窝”电话),具有移动终端设备的计算机,便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的移动装置等。例如,个人通信业务(personal communication service,PCS)电话、无绳电话、会话发起协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)话机、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、等设备。还包括受限设备,例如功耗较低的设备,或存储能力有限的设备,或计算能力有限的设备等。例如包括条码、射频识别(radio frequency identification,RFID)、传感器、全球定位系统(global positioning system,GPS)、激光扫描器等信息传感设备。
作为示例而非限定,在本申请实施例中,该终端设备还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备或智能穿戴式设备等,是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称,如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上,或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备,更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能,例如:智能手表或智能眼镜等,以及只专注于某一类应用功能,需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用,如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能头盔、智能首饰等。
而如上介绍的各种终端设备,如果位于车辆上(例如放置在车辆内或安装在车辆内),都可以认为是车载终端设备,车载终端设备例如也称为车载单元(on-board unit,OBU)。本申请实施例的终端设备还可以是作为一个或多个部件或者单元而内置于车辆的车载模块、车载模组、车载部件、车载芯片或者车载单元,车辆通过内置的所述车载模块、车载模组、车载部件、车载芯片或者车载单元可以实施本申请实施例的方法。
本申请实施例中,终端设备还可以包括中继(relay)。或者理解为,能够与基站进行数据通信的都可以看作终端设备。
终端装置,可以是终端设备,或者也可以是用于实现终端设备的功能的模块。该模块可以设置在终端设备中,或者也可以与终端设备彼此独立设置,该模块例如为芯片等。
2)V2X就是车与外界进行互联互通,这是未来智能汽车、自动驾驶、智能交通运输系统的基础和关键技术。V2X将在已有的设备到设备(device-to-device,D2D)技术的基础上对V2X的具体应用需求进行优化,需要进一步减少V2X设备的接入时延,解决资源冲突问题。
V2X具体又包括车与车(vehicle-to-vehicle,V2V)、车与路侧基础设施(vehicle-to-infrastructure,V2I)、车与行人(vehicle-to-pedestrian,V2P)的直接通信,以及车与网络(vehicle-to-network,V2N)的通信交互等几种应用需求。如图1所示。V2V指的是车辆间的通信;V2P指的是车辆与人(包括行人、骑自行车的人、司机、或乘客)的通信;V2I指的是车辆与网络设备的通信,网络设备例如RSU,另外还有一种V2N可以包括在V2I中,V2N指的是车辆与基站/网络的通信。
其中,V2P可以用做给道路上行人或非机动车安全警告。通过V2I,车辆可以与道路甚至其他基础设施,例如交通灯、路障等,进行通信,获取交通灯信号时序等道路管理信息。V2V可以用做车辆间信息交互和提醒,最典型的应用是用于车辆间防碰撞安全系统。 V2N是目前应用最为广泛的车联网形式,其主要功能是使车辆通过移动网络,连接到云服务器,使用云服务器提供的导航、娱乐、或防盗等应用功能。
在V2X中,主要是终端设备和终端设备之间的通信。对于终端设备和终端设备之间的传输模式,当前标准协议支持的有广播方式,组播方式,和单播方式。
广播方式:广播方式是指作为发送端的终端设备采用广播的模式进行数据发送,多个终端设备端均能接收来自发送端的侧行链路控制信息(sidelink control information,SCI)或侧行链路共享信道(sidelink shared channel,SSCH)。
在侧行链路中,保证所有的终端设备都解析来自发送端的控制信息的方式是,发送端不对控制信息加扰,或者发送端使用所有的终端设备都已知的扰码对控制信息加扰。
组播方式:组播方式和广播发送相似,作为发送端的终端设备采用广播的模式进行数据发送,一组终端设备均能解析SCI或SSCH。
单播方式:单播方式是一个终端设备向另外一个终端设备发送数据,其它终端设备不需要或者不能够解析该数据。
3)波束管理(beam management),是5G NR针对FR2提出的重要技术,是指5G的基站(next generation nodeB,gNB)和UE之间获取并维护用于发送和接收的波束集合的过程。波束管理包括两个重要功能:波束训练和波束失败恢复(beam failure recovery,BFR)。BFR是指,UE按gNB配置的BFD准则检测到服务波束(serving beam)失败后,尝试通过可用的候选波束(candidate beam)代替服务波束,使得发送和接收波束对重新变为可用的过程。对于NR Uu接口,服务波束是指gNB与UE之间传输有用信号的波束,有用信号包括数据信号,还包括用于执行BFD的参考信号。候选波束指gNB和UE之间不传输有用信号但传输参考信号以进行质量测量的波束。
4)本申请实施例在介绍时,主要是以检测终端装置和终端装置之间的波束为例进行说明。当需要检测其它波束时,在下文中所述的第一终端装置和第二终端装置,应相应替换为对应场景中的装置。例如,要检测基站和终端装置之间的波束,如果是做下行波束检测,则第一终端装置可以替换为基站,第二终端装置可以是第二终端装置;如果是做上行波束检测,则第一终端装置可以是第一终端装置,第二终端装置可以替换为基站。又例如,要检测路侧单元(road side unit,RSU)和终端装置之间的波束,如果是做下行波束检测,第一终端装置可以替换为RSU,第二终端装置可以是第二终端装置;如果是做上行波束检测,第一终端装置可以是第一终端装置,第二终端装置可以替换为RSU。
5)本申请实施例中的术语“系统”和“网络”可被互换使用。“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a,b,或c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c,或a-b-c,其中a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。
以及,除非有相反的说明,本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”等序数词是用于对多个对象进行区分,不用于限定多个对象的顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度。例如,第一参考信号和第二参考信号,只是为了区分不同的参考信号,而并不一定是表示这两种参考信号的内容、优先级、发送顺序或者重要程度等的不同。
如上介绍了本申请实施例涉及的一些概念,下面介绍本申请实施例的技术特征。
首先介绍NR Uu口的BFD和BFR的方法。
①BFD。目前,BFD的条件是:连续N次,gNB所有的服务波束被认为失败。关于服务波束的介绍可参考前文。其中,N由无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)信令中的波束失败实例最大计数值(beam failure instance max count)字段指示。服务波束被认为失败的准则是:服务波束中传输的用于检测波束失败的参考信号的参考信号接收功率(reference signal received power,RSRP)对应的假想(hypothetical)物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH)误块率(block error rate,BLER)高于给定的阈值,该阈值使用无线链路监测(radio link monitoring,RLM)中声明失同步(out-of-sync)所用的默认BLER阈值。
②新的候选波束识别,指gNB在一系列的候选波束中发送参考信号,帮助UE从中选择候选波束作为新的服务波束,以恢复连接的发送与接收波束对。gNB在候选波束中发送的参考信号,例如为信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS)或者同步信号块(synchronization signal block,SSB)等,具体的参考信号由RRC信令中的候选波束参考信号列表(candidate beam RS list)字段指示。当UE发现候选波束中发送的参考信号的RSRP高于配置的阈值时,认为对应的候选波束可用,即,该候选波束可以作为新的服务波束。该阈值由RRC信令中的RSRP阈值SSB(rsrp-threshold SSB)字段显式或隐式地指示。
其中,如上的第①个步骤可以发生在第②个步骤之前,或者第①个步骤可以发生在第②个步骤之后,或者第①个步骤和第②个步骤可以同时发生。
③UE向gNB发送波束失败恢复请求(beam failure recovery request,BFRR),gNB接收来自UE的BFRR。UE主要在物理随机接入信道(physical random access channel,PRACH)上发送BFRR,或者可以在物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH)上以扫描的方式发送BFRR。如果UE识别出有可用的候选波束,则BFRR包含该可用的候选波束的信息,如果UE未识别出可用的候选波束,则不发送BFRR。如果UE不发送BFRR,UE将通知UE的高层,指示UE处于波束失败状态。另外,如果UE不发送BFRR,则gNB无法接收来自UE的BFRR,gNB也将通知gNB的高层,指示gNB处于波束失败状态。UE的高层和gNB的高层可以进行波束恢复。
④UE监测gNB对BFRR的响应。如果UE向gNB发送了BFRR,则UE可以启动一个时间窗,在该时间窗内监测gNB对BFRR的响应。如果在该时间窗内接收到来自gNB的响应,则UE确定BFR成功,如果在该时间窗内未接收来自gNB的响应,则UE可以再次发送BFRR,当重复发送一定次数的BFRR而仍未收到来自gNB的响应时,UE将通知UE的高层,指示UE处于波束失败状态。UE的高层和gNB的高层可以进行波束恢复。
如上只是NR Uu口的BFD和BFR的方法,而在SL通信中尚没有BFD方法,也没有BFR方法。而且,对于gNB来说,可选的发送波束可能有多个,服务波束和候选波束只是可选的发送波束中的部分波束。以NR Uu口的BFD和BFR的方法为例,可以看到,在确定服务波束和候选波束都失败时,UE会将波束恢复的过程交给高层进行处理。对于NR Uu口来说,存在gNB这一节点,gNB会不断发送SSB,如果由高层来恢复波束,那么高层可以将SSB作为参考信号来进行波束恢复。即使UE使用如上介绍的BFD和BFR方法未能恢复波束,而由高层来进行波束恢复,SSB是不断发送的,UE的高层可以在较短的时间内获得SSB,从 而完成波束的恢复。但是对于侧行链路来说,没有不断地发送参考信号的节点,如果由高层来恢复波束,高层可能在较长时间内都无法获得用于进行波束恢复的参考信号,从而使得波束恢复的效率较低,甚至可能无法完成波束恢复。
鉴于此,提供本申请实施例的技术方案。在本申请实施例中,第一终端装置可以向第二终端装置发送第一参考信号,从而第一终端装置可以确定K1个方向上的波束是否失败,相当于提供了一种在SL通信中进行波束失败检测的机制。另外,如果第一终端装置确定K1个方向上的波束失败,则第一终端装置还可以在P1个方向上向第二终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号,可以理解为,K1个方向是第一终端装置的服务波束对应的方向,而P1个方向是第一终端装置支持的部分发送方向或全部发送方向,P1个方向所包括的方向的个数可以大于K1个方向所包括的方向的个数,也就是说,如果K1个方向上的波束失败,则第一终端装置可以继续确定更多个方向(即P1个方向)上是否有可用的波束,而P1个方向上有可用波束的可能性会大于K1个方向上有可用波束的可能性,提高了获得可用波束的可能性。通过这种方式,尽量通过物理层确定可用波束,或者说通过物理层对波束进行恢复,无需通过高层来恢复波束,提高了波束恢复的效率,也减小了因波束失败而导致的业务时延。
本申请实施例提供的技术方案可以应用于D2D场景,可以是NR D2D场景也可以是LTE D2D场景等,或者可以应用于V2X场景,可以是NR V2X场景也可以是LTE V2X场景等,或者还可以应用于其他的场景或其他的通信系统,例如还可以用于LTE系统或NR系统的Uu接口的波束检测等。
下面介绍本申请实施例所应用的网络架构。请参考图2,为本申请实施例所应用的一种网络架构。
图2中包括网络设备和两个终端设备,分别为终端设备1和终端设备2,例如终端设备1为发送端的终端设备,终端设备2为接收端的终端设备。这两个终端设备均可以与网络设备连接,或者这两个终端设备可以只有终端设备1与网络设备连接,终端设备2不与网络设备连接。这两个终端设备之间可以通过SL进行通信,例如终端设备1可以通过服务波束向终端设备2发送数据,也可以通过候选波束向终端设备2发送参考信号等。当然图2中的终端设备的数量只是举例,在实际应用中,网络设备可以为多个终端设备提供服务。
图2中的网络设备例如为接入网设备,例如基站。其中,接入网设备在不同的系统对应不同的设备,例如在4G系统中可以对应eNB,在5G系统中对应5G中的接入网设备,例如gNB,或为后续演进的通信系统中的接入网设备。
其中,图2中的终端设备是以车载终端设备或车为例,但本申请实施例中的终端设备不限于此。
接下来结合附图介绍本申请实施例提供的技术方案。在本申请的各个实施例中,涉及到了波束“失败”的概念,这里先对此概念介绍。
波束失败实例(beam-failure instance):终端装置接收来自基站(例如gNB)的与PDCCH准共址(quasi co-located,QCL)的参考信号。终端设备测量该参考信号的RSRP,如果测量的RSRP对应的hypothetical PDCCH BLER高于给定的阈值,则认为发生一次波束失败实例。
对于波束失败实例定义的本质其实是,关注通信质量时往往是关注控制信道中的控制 信号是否能够成功地传给接收端。如果控制信号都没能以较低的BLER被接收端接收,那么该连接就可以被认为是失败的。“与PDCCH准共址”,说明以上参考信号所经历的信道与控制信号所经历的信道是相同的,如果该参考信号的RSRP很低,那么自然就会导致信噪比低,也导致BLER很高。通过将该参考信号的RSRP转化为假想BLER,再与给定的阈值比较,就可以判断PDCCH的质量。
如果将此概念转换到侧行链路中,例如,第二终端装置接收来自第一终端装置的与物理侧行控制信道(physical sidelink control channel,PSCCH)准共址的参考信号,第二终端装置测量该参考信号的RSRP,如果测量的RSRP对应的假想PSCCH BLER高于给定的阈值,则认为发生一次波束失败实例。
波束失败(beam failure):如果波束失败实例连续发生的次数大于或等于给定的次数,则认为波束失败。
另外,在本申请的各个实施例中还涉及到了波束“可用”的概念。例如在本申请的各个实施例中,第一终端装置的一个波束(例如发送波束)可用,可以是指,该波束可以被用来向第二终端装置发送数据信号。
本申请实施例提供第一种通信方法,请参见图3,为该方法的流程图。在下文的介绍过程中,以该方法应用于图2所示的网络架构为例。另外,该方法可由两个通信装置执行,这两个通信装置例如为第一通信装置和第二通信装置。其中,第一通信装置或第二通信装置,可以是网络设备或能够支持网络设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置,或者可以是终端设备或能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置,当然还可以是其他通信装置,例如芯片。且对于第一通信装置或第二通信装置的实现方式均不做限制,例如这两个通信装置可以实现为相同的形式,例如均通过设备的形式实现,或者这两个通信装置也可以实现为不同的形式,例如第一通信装置通过设备的形式实现,第二通信装置通过芯片的方式实现,等等。其中,网络设备例如为基站。
为了便于介绍,在下文中,以该方法由终端装置和终端装置执行为例,也就是说,以第一通信装置是终端装置(例如称为第一终端装置)、第二通信装置也是终端装置(例如称为第二终端装置)为例。因为本实施例是以应用在图2所示的网络架构为例,因此,下文中所述的第一终端装置可以实现图2所示的网络架构中的终端设备1的功能,下文中所述的第二终端装置可以实现图2所示的网络架构中的终端设备2的功能。
S31、第一终端装置在K1个方向上向第二终端装置发送K2个第一参考信号,第二终端装置接收第一终端装置在K1个方向上发送的K2个第一参考信号,或者说,第二终端装置接收来自第一终端装置对应的K1个方向上的K2个第一参考信号。第一终端装置对应的K1个方向,是指第一终端装置的K1个发送方向,因此K2个第一参考信号是第一终端装置发送给第二终端装置的,且是通过K1个方向发送的。
其中,K1个方向均是第一终端装置的发送方向,因此,K1个方向也可以称为K1个发送方向。K1为正整数,K2可以是大于或等于K1的整数,也就是说,在K1个方向中的一个方向上,可以发送一个或多个第一参考信号。K1个方向,可以对应于K1个波束,或者说对应于K1个发送波束,K2个第一参考信号中的一个第一参考信号可以用于检测对应方向上的波束是否失败。对于一个第一参考信号来说,所谓的“对应方向”,可以是指该第一参考信号所在的方向,或者,是指该第一参考信号的发送方向,或者,是指该第一参考信号所在的波束所指向的方向。第一参考信号例如为CSI-RS或SSB等。所谓“对应方向上的波束”, 是指用于发送该第一参考信号的波束。例如,K2个第一参考信号中的第一参考信号1,是在K1个方向中的方向1上发送,那么第一参考信号1对应方向上的波束,就是指方向1上的波束。
K1个波束,可以是第一终端装置的服务波束,例如K1个波束中的每个波束可以用来向第二终端装置发送数据信号。例如K1个波束是第一终端装置的全部服务波束,或者是第一终端装置的部分服务波束。那么,K1个方向中的每个方向就可以是第一终端装置向第二终端装置发送数据信号的方向。
S32、第一终端装置确定,连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败。N1为正整数。
例如,N1可以由网络设备配置,或者可以由第一终端装置配置,或者由第二终端装置配置,或者也可以通过协议规定。
例如,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败,可以是指,所述K1个方向上的波束均发生了波束失败实例。后文所述K1个方向上的波束均失败,也可以遵循相应定义。
例如,此处的波束失败实例,可以是指,与PSCCH准共址的参考信号的RSRP对应的hypothetical PSCCH BLER高于给定的阈值,或者,与PSCCH准共址的参考信号的RSRP低于给定的阈值。
连续N1次,K1个方向上的波束均失败,这可以认为是BFD条件所包括的内容,或者说,认为是BFD的一种条件。BFD条件可以只包括这一种,或者还可以包括其他的条件。
作为第一终端装置确定连续N1次K1个方向上的波束均失败的一种方式,第二终端装置在接收K2个第一参考信号后,可以对K2个第一参考信号进行测量,并根据测量结果确定K1个波束是否失败。例如测量结果为RSRP,如果一个波束中传输的第一参考信号的RSRP对应的假想PSCCH BLER大于第一阈值,则第二终端装置认为该波束失败。第一阈值例如等于如前介绍的第①个步骤中BFD条件中的阈值,或者,第一阈值可以由网络设备配置,或者可以由第一终端装置配置,或者由第二终端装置配置,或者也可以通过协议规定。如果确定连续N1次K1个方向上的波束均失败,第二终端装置可以向第一终端装置发送BFRR,第一终端装置可以接收来自第二终端装置的BFRR,BFRR可以指示连续N1次,K1个方向上的波束均失败。第一终端装置只要接收了BFRR,就可以确定连续N1次,K1个方向上的波束均失败。
其中,如果第一终端装置和第二终端装置处于同一个网络设备的覆盖范围内,则第二终端装置可以将BFRR发送给该网络设备,该网络设备接收该BFRR后,可以将该BFRR转发给第一终端装置。例如,第二终端装置可以将BFRR承载在物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH)或物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH)中发送给网络设备。或者,即使第一终端装置和第二终端装置处于同一个网络设备的覆盖范围内,第二终端装置也可以直接将BFRR发送给第一终端装置,无需通过网络设备中转,这样可以减小时延。如果第一终端装置和第二终端装置处于不同的网络设备的覆盖范围内,则第二终端装置可以直接将BFRR发送给第一终端装置,或者第二终端装置可以将BFRR发送给第二终端装置所在的网络设备,第二终端装置所在的网络设备将BFRR转发给第一终端装置所在的网络设备,第一终端装置所在的网络设备再将BFRR转发给第一终端装置。
如果第一终端装置接收了BFRR,那么第一终端装置可以向第二终端装置发送第二响应消息,第二响应消息可以是BFRR的响应消息。如果第一终端装置和第二终端装置处于同一个网络设备的覆盖范围内,则第一终端装置可以将第二响应消息发送给该网络设备, 该网络设备接收该第二响应消息后,可以将该第二响应消息转发给第二终端装置。例如,第一终端装置可以将第二响应消息承载在PUCCH或PUSCH中发送给该网络设备。或者,即使第一终端装置和第二终端装置处于同一个网络设备的覆盖范围内,第一终端装置也可以直接将第二响应消息发送给第二终端装置,无需通过网络设备中转,这样可以减小时延。如果第一终端装置和第二终端装置处于不同的网络设备的覆盖范围内,则第一终端装置可以直接将第二响应消息发送给第二终端装置,或者第一终端装置可以将第二响应消息发送给第一终端装置所在的网络设备,第一终端装置所在的网络设备将第二响应消息转发给第二终端装置所在的网络设备,第二终端装置所在的网络设备再将第二响应消息转发给第二终端装置。
第二终端装置在发送BFRR后,可以维护第一时间窗,例如表示为时间窗W1,第二终端装置可以在时间窗W1内检测第二响应消息。如果在时间窗W1内未检测到第二响应消息,第二终端装置可以再次向第一终端装置发送BFRR,以及再次检测第二响应消息,以此类推。第二终端装置发送BFRR的总数量可以由第二终端装置配置,或者由网络设备配置,或者由第一终端装置配置,或者通过协议规定。例如第二终端装置发送的BFRR的总数量可以为正整数。如果第二终端装置发送BFRR的数量已经达到了该总数量,而第二终端装置依然未接收到第二响应消息,则第二终端装置可以告知第二终端装置的高层,第二终端装置的高层可以进行波束恢复。
例如,K1个波束为高频波束,即为FR2的波束。如果第二终端装置向第一终端装置发送BFRR,可以通过FR2的链路发送,或者也可以通过第一频率范围(frequency range 1,FR1)的链路发送,例如可以通过PSCCH或物理侧行共享信道(physical sidelinkshare channel,PSSCH)来发送BFRR。如果通过PSSCH来发送BFRR,一种方式可以是,将BFRR承载在MAC控制单元(control element,CE)中。由于K1个波束已经失败,因此通过FR1的链路发送BFRR,可以提高BFRR的发送成功率。第一终端装置向第二终端装置发送第二响应消息,可以通过FR2的链路发送,或者也可以通过FR1的链路发送,例如通过PSCCH或PSSCH来发送第二响应消息。
或者,作为第一终端装置确定连续N1次K1个方向上的波束均失败的另一种方式,第二终端装置在接收K2个第一参考信号后,可以对K2个第一参考信号进行测量,获得测量结果,第二终端装置可以向第一终端装置发送第一消息,第一消息可以指示第二终端装置对K2个第一参考信号的测量结果。第一终端装置接收来自第二终端装置的第一消息,就可以获得K2个第一参考信号的测量结果。例如测量结果为RSRP,如果一个波束中传输的第一参考信号的RSRP对应的假想PSCCH BLER大于给定的阈值,则第一终端装置认为该波束失败。从而第一终端装置可以确定是否连续N1次K1个方向上的波束均失败。或者,测量结果也可以是参考信号接收质量(reference signal receiving quality,RSRQ)等,对此不做限制。或者,第二终端装置发送给第一终端装置的第一消息,也可以不是包括K2个第一参考信号的测量结果,而是包括第一指示信息,该第一指示信息可以指示K1个波束中可用的波束,或者指示K1个波束均不可用。第一终端装置接收来自第二终端装置的第一消息,就可以确定K1个波束中可用的波束,或者确定K1个波束均不可用。
在这种方式下,第一终端装置和第二终端装置无需交互BFRR和第二响应消息,减少了波束检测过程的步骤,进一步提高了波束恢复的效率。
在执行S32之后,可以执行S33和S34;或者,作为一种可选的方式,在执行S33之 前,还可以执行S35和S36。另外,S31和S35可以同时执行,或者也可以先执行S31后执行S35。
S33、第一终端装置在P1个方向上向第二终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号,第二终端装置接收第一终端装置在P1个方向上发送的P2个第二参考信号,或者说,第二终端装置接收来自第一终端装置对应的P1个方向上的P2个第二参考信号。第一终端装置对应的P1个方向,是指第一终端装置的P1个发送方向,因此P2个第二参考信号是第一终端装置发送给第二终端装置的,且是通过P1个方向发送的。
其中,P1个方向均是第一终端装置的发送方向,因此,P1个方向也可以称为P1个发送方向。P1和P2均为正整数,P2可以大于或等于P1,也就是说,在P1个方向中的一个方向上,可以发送一个或多个第一参考信号。P1个方向,可以对应于P1个波束,或者说对应于P1个发送波束,P2个第二参考信号中的一个第二参考信号可以用于测量对应方向上的波束的质量。对于一个第二参考信号来说,所谓的“对应方向”,可以是指该第二参考信号所在的方向,或者,是指该第二参考信号的发送方向,或者,是指该第二参考信号所在的波束所指向的方向。第二参考信号例如为CSI-RS或SSB等。所谓“对应方向上的波束”,是指用于发送该第二参考信号的波束。例如,P2个第二参考信号中的第二参考信号1,是在P1个方向中的方向2上发送,那么第二参考信号1对应方向上的波束,就是指方向2上的波束。
P1个方向,可以是第一终端装置所支持的全部发送方向中的部分发送方向,此时P1个方向中可以包括K1个方向也可以不包括K1个方向。例如,第一终端装置共支持64个发送方向,P1=32,即P1个方向是这64个方向中的32个方向,同时K1=1,P1个方向包括K1个方向,即K1个方向只是P1个方向中的一个方向。又例如,第一终端装置共支持64个发送方向,P1=32,即P1个方向是这64个方向中的32个方向,同时K1=1,P1个方向不包括K1个方向,即P1个方向是这64个方向中除K1个方向之外的32个方向。或者,P1个方向,还可以是第一终端装置所支持的全部发送方向,此时P1个方向中包括K1个方向,P1大于或等于K1。例如,第一终端装置共支持64个发送方向,P1=64,而K1=1,即K1个方向只是这64个方向中的一个方向。
相当于,如果K1个方向上的波束失败,则第一终端装置可以继续确定更多个方向(即P1个方向)上是否有可用的波束,而P1个方向上有可用波束的可能性会大于K1个方向上有可用波束的可能性,提高了获得可用波束的可能性。通过这种方式,尽量通过物理层确定可用波束,或者说通过物理层对波束进行恢复,减少了通过高层来恢复波束的概率。对于侧行链路来说,没有不断地发送参考信号的节点,如果由高层来恢复波束,高层可能在较长时间内都无法获得用于进行波束恢复的参考信号,从而使得波束恢复的效率较低,甚至可能无法完成波束恢复。可见,通过本申请实施例提供的技术方案,尽量通过物理层来进行波束恢复,提高了波束恢复的效率,也减小了因波束失败而导致的业务时延。
S34、第二终端装置向第一终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,第一终端装置接收来自第二终端装置的所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果。
例如,第二终端装置在接收P2个第二参考信号后,可以对P2个第二参考信号进行测量,获得测量结果。第二终端装置可以向第一终端装置发送第一响应消息,第一响应消息包括P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,第一终端装置接收来自第二终端装置的第一响应消息,就获得了P2个第二参考信号的测量结果。
或者,第二终端装置发送给第一终端装置的第一响应消息,也可以不是包括P2个第二 参考信号的测量结果,而是包括第二指示信息,该第二指示信息可以指示P1个波束中可用的波束,或者指示P1个波束均不可用。
其中,如果第一终端装置和第二终端装置处于同一个网络设备的覆盖范围内,则第二终端装置可以将第一响应消息发送给该网络设备,该网络设备接收该第一响应消息后,可以将该第一响应消息转发给第一终端装置。例如,第二终端装置可以将第一响应消息承载在PUCCH或PUSCH中发送给网络设备。或者,即使第一终端装置和第二终端装置处于同一个网络设备的覆盖范围内,第二终端装置也可以直接将第一响应消息发送给第一终端装置,无需通过网络设备中转,这样可以减小时延。如果第一终端装置和第二终端装置处于不同的网络设备的覆盖范围内,则第二终端装置可以直接将第一响应消息发送给第一终端装置,或者第二终端装置可以将第一响应消息发送给第二终端装置所在的网络设备,第二终端装置所在的网络设备将第一响应消息转发给第一终端装置所在的网络设备,第一终端装置所在的网络设备再将第一响应消息转发给第一终端装置。
S35、第一终端装置在M1个方向上向第二终端装置发送M2个第三参考信号,第二终端装置接收第一终端装置在M1个方向上发送的M2个第三参考信号,或者说,第二终端装置接收来自第一终端装置对应的M1个方向上的M2个第三参考信号。第一终端装置对应的M1个方向,是指第一终端装置的M1个发送方向,因此M2个第三参考信号是第一终端装置发送给第二终端装置的,且是通过M1个方向发送的。
其中,M1个方向均是第一终端装置的发送方向,因此,M1个方向也可以称为M1个发送方向。M1为正整数,M2可以是大于或等于M1的整数,也就是说,在M1个方向中的一个方向上,可以发送一个或多个第三参考信号。M1个方向,可以对应于M1个波束,或者说对应于M1个发送波束,M2个第三参考信号中的一个第三参考信号可以用于检测该一个第三参考信号所在的方向上的波束是否可用。例如,第三参考信号所在的方向上的波束可用,可以是指,该波束可以被用来恢复第一终端装置和第二终端装置之间的连接。对于一个第三参考信号来说,所谓的“对应方向”,可以是指该第三参考信号所在的方向,或者,是指该第三参考信号的发送方向,或者,是指该第三参考信号所在的波束所指向的方向。所谓“对应方向上的波束”,是指用于发送该第三参考信号的波束。例如,M2个第三参考信号中的第三参考信号1,是在M1个方向中的方向3上发送,那么第三参考信号1对应方向上的波束,就是指方向3上的波束。
M1个波束,可以是第一终端装置的候选波束。例如M1个波束是第一终端装置的全部候选波束,或者是第一终端装置的部分候选波束。
如果P1个方向是第一终端装置所支持的全部发送方向,那么P1个方向可以包括M1个方向,也就是说,P1个方向可以包括K1个方向和M1个方向。P1个方向除了包括K1个方向和M1个方向之外,还可以包括其他的方向。例如,P1=64,第一终端装置共支持64个发送方向,或者说,第一终端装置共支持64个波束。K1=1,第一终端装置有一个服务波束,M1=3,第一终端装置有3个候选波束,那么,64个波束中,除了包括1个服务波束和3个候选波束之外,还包括剩余的60个波束。或者,P1个方向也可以只包括K1个方向和M1个方向,不再包括其他的方向。又或者,P1个方向是第一终端装置所支持的全部发送方向中的部分发送方向,此时P1个方向可以包括M1个方向也可以不包括M1个方向。
S36、第一终端装置确定,连续N2次,所述M1个方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通 信连接。N2为正整数。所谓“恢复通信连接”,是指恢复第一终端装置与第二终端装置之间的通信连接。
例如,N2可以由网络设备配置,或者可以由第一终端装置配置,或者由第二终端装置配置,或者也可以通过协议规定。
连续N2次,M1个方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接,这可以认为是BFD条件所包括的内容,或者说,认为是BFD的一种条件。例如,BFD条件可以包括,连续N1次,K1个方向上的波束均失败,以及,连续N2次,M1个方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接。或者,BFD条件还可以包括其他的条件。
作为第一终端装置确定连续N2次M1个方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接的一种方式,第二终端装置在接收M2个第二参考信号后,可以对M2个第二参考信号进行测量,并根据测量结果确定M1个波束是否可以被用来恢复通信连接。例如测量结果为RSRP,如果一个波束中传输的第三参考信号的RSRP大于第二阈值,则第二终端装置认为该波束可以被用来恢复通信连接,否则认为不可以被用来恢复通信连接。第二阈值例如等于如前介绍的第②个步骤中的阈值,或者,第二阈值可以由网络设备配置,或者可以由第一终端装置配置,或者由第二终端装置配置,或者也可以通过协议规定。如果确定连续N1次,K1个方向上的波束均失败,以及连续N2次,M1个方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接,第二终端装置可以向第一终端装置发送BFRR,第一终端装置可以接收来自第二终端装置的BFRR。在这种情况下,BFRR可以指示连续N1次,K1个方向上的波束均失败,以及指示,连续N2次,M1个方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接。第一终端装置只要接收了BFRR,就可以确定连续N1次,K1个方向上的波束均失败,以及确定,连续N2次,M1个方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接。关于第一终端装置向第二终端装置发送BFRR的方式等内容,可参考S32中的相关介绍。
如果第一终端装置接收了BFRR,那么第一终端装置可以向第二终端装置发送第二响应消息,第二响应消息可以是BFRR的响应消息。关于第一终端装置向第二终端装置发送第二响应消息的方式等内容,可参考S32中的相关介绍。
或者,作为第一终端装置确定连续N2次M1个方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接的另一种方式,第二终端装置在接收M2个第二参考信号后,可以对M2个第二参考信号进行测量,获得测量结果,第二终端装置可以向第一终端装置发送第四消息,第四消息可以指示第二终端装置对M2个第二参考信号的测量结果,第二终端装置可以通过第四消息将测量结果发送给第一终端装置,第一终端装置可以接收来自第二终端装置的第四消息。例如测量结果为RSRP,如果一个波束中传输的第二参考信号的RSRP低于第二阈值,则第一终端装置认为该波束不可以被用来恢复通信连接。从而第一终端装置可以确定是否连续N2次M1个方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接。或者,测量结果也可以是RSRQ等,对此不做限制。
如果在执行S32之后直接执行S33和S34,即不执行S35和S36,那么相当于,第一终端装置在确定连续N1次K1个方向上的波束均失败后,就可以向第二终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号;或者,如果执行S32后还要执行S35和S36,之后再执行S33和S34,那么相当于,第一终端装置在确定连续N1次K1个方向上的波束均失败,以及确定连续N2次M1个方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接后,再向第二终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号。
S37、第一终端装置根据P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,确定P1个方向对应的P1个波 束是否可用。
例如,第二终端装置通过S34中的步骤接收了来自第二终端设备的P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,则第一终端装置可以根据P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,确定P1个方向对应的P1个波束是否可用。测量结果例如为RSRP,如果第一终端装置确定一个RSRP大于第三阈值,则第一终端装置确定该RSRP对应的第二参考信号所对应的波束是可用的波束,否则,如果第一终端装置确定一个RSRP小于或等于第三阈值,则第一终端装置确定该RSRP对应的第二参考信号所对应的波束是不可用的波束。第三阈值可以由网络设备配置,或者可以由第一终端装置配置,或者由第二终端装置配置,或者也可以通过协议规定。或者,第二参考信号的测量结果也可以是RSRQ等,具体的不做限制。
或者,第二终端装置在S34中发送给第一终端装置的,也可以是指示信息,该指示信息可以指示P1个波束中可用的波束,或者指示P1个波束均不可用。那么第一终端装置接收该指示信息后,就可以确定P1个波束是否可用,无需再根据测量结果进行判断,简化了第一终端装置的实现。
在确定P1个波束是否可用之后,第一终端装置可以向第二终端装置发送第二消息,第二消息用于指示P1个波束中可用的波束,或者指示P1个波束均不可用。第二终端装置接收第二消息后,如果第二消息指示P1个波束中可用的波束,第二终端装置可以根据第二消息确定P1个波束中有哪些波束可用,或者,如果第二消息指示P1个波束均不可用,则第二终端装置根据第二消息可以确定P1个波束均不可用。第二消息如果指示P1个波束中可用的波束,一种方式为,第二消息包括P1个波束中可用的波束的标识,波束的标识例如为波束的ID或者波束的编号等,第二终端装置根据第二消息所包括的波束的标识就可以确定这些标识所对应的波束是可用的波束。
或者,作为另一种可选的实施方式,在确定P1个波束是否可用之后,如果P1个波束中有可用的波束,则第一终端装置可以向第二终端装置发送第二消息,第二消息用于指示P1个波束中可用的波束。第二终端装置接收第二消息后,可以根据第二消息确定P1个波束中有哪些波束可用。而如果P1个波束中没有可用的波束,则第一终端装置可以不向第二终端装置发送第二消息。如果第二终端装置未接收来自第一终端装置的第二消息,也就可以确定P1个波束均不可用。
其中,如果第一终端装置和第二终端装置处于同一个网络设备的覆盖范围内,则第一终端装置可以将第二消息发送给该网络设备,该网络设备接收该第二消息后,可以将该第二消息转发给第二终端装置。例如,第一终端装置可以将第二消息承载在PUCCH或PUSCH中发送给该网络设备。或者,即使第一终端装置和第二终端装置处于同一个网络设备的覆盖范围内,第一终端装置也可以直接将第二消息发送给第二终端装置,无需通过网络设备中转,这样可以减小时延。如果第一终端装置和第二终端装置处于不同的网络设备的覆盖范围内,则第一终端装置可以直接将第二消息发送给第二终端装置,或者第一终端装置可以将第二消息发送给第一终端装置所在的网络设备,第一终端装置所在的网络设备将第二消息转发给第二终端装置所在的网络设备,第二终端装置所在的网络设备再将第二消息转发给第二终端装置。
或者,如果第一终端装置确定P1个波束均不可用,第一终端装置也可以不向第二终端装置发送消息,即,不发送第二消息。第二终端装置如果未接收来自第一终端装置的第二消息,就可以确定P1个波束均不可用。
如果第一终端装置确定P1个波束中有可用的波束,那么第一终端装置可以选择可用的波束中的部分波束或全部波束作为第一终端装置的服务波束,相当于完成了波束恢复。对于第二终端装置来说也是同样,如果第二终端装置确定P1个波束中有可用的波束,那么第二终端装置可以确定可用的波束中的部分波束或全部波束为第一终端装置的服务波束,相当于完成了波束恢复。例如,究竟选择哪些可用的波束作为新的服务波束,可以由第一终端装置选择,第一终端装置选择后可以向第二终端装置发送第三消息,第三消息用于指示新的服务波束,例如第三消息可以包括新的服务波束的标识。第二终端装置接收第三消息后,就可以确定哪些波束作为了第一终端装置的新的服务波束。
而如果第一终端装置确定P1个波束均不可用,则第一终端装置可以告知第一终端装置的高层,第一终端装置的高层可以进行波束恢复。同理,如果第二终端装置确定P1个波束均不可用,则第二终端装置可以告知第二终端装置的高层,第二终端装置的高层可以进行波束恢复。具体的,第二终端装置的高层可以与第一终端装置的高层进行配合,以进行波束恢复。具体的,第一终端装置的高层可以与第二终端装置的高层进行配合,以进行波束恢复。例如,第一终端装置的高层和第二终端装置的高层可以采用无线链路检测(radio link monitoring,RLM)等方式来进行波束恢复。终端装置的高层例如包括如下的一层或多层:RRC层,媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层,无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层,或,分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层。例如,终端装置的高层包括RRC层;或者,终端装置的高层包括RLC层和PDCP层;或者,终端装置的高层包括MAC层;或者,终端装置的高层包括MAC层、RLC层、PDCP层和RRC层,等等。
在本申请实施例中,第一终端装置可以向第二终端装置发送第一参考信号,从而第一终端装置可以确定K1个方向上的波束是否失败,相当于提供了一种在SL通信中进行波束失败检测的机制。另外,如果第一终端装置确定K1个方向上的波束失败,则第一终端装置还可以在P1个方向上向第二终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号,可以理解为,K1个方向是第一终端装置的服务波束对应的方向,而P1个方向是第一终端装置支持的所有发送方向中的部分或全部,P1个方向所包括的方向的个数可以大于K1个方向所包括的方向的个数,也就是说,如果K1个方向上的波束失败,则第一终端装置可以继续确定更多个方向(即P1个方向)上是否有可用的波束,而P1个方向上有可用波束的可能性会大于K1个方向上有可用波束的可能性,提高了获得可用波束的可能性。通过这种方式,尽量通过物理层确定可用波束,或者说通过物理层对波束进行恢复,无需通过高层来恢复波束,提高了波束恢复的效率,也减小了因波束失败而导致的业务时延。
为了解决相同的技术问题,本申请实施例提供第二种通信方法,请参见图4,为该方法的流程图。在下文的介绍过程中,以该方法应用于图2所示的网络架构为例。另外,该方法可由两个通信装置执行,这两个通信装置例如为第一通信装置和第二通信装置。其中,第一通信装置或第二通信装置,可以是网络设备或能够支持网络设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置,或者可以是终端设备或能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置,当然还可以是其他通信装置,例如芯片。且对于第一通信装置或第二通信装置的实现方式均不做限制,例如这两个通信装置可以实现为相同的形式,例如均通过设备的形式实现,或者这两个通信装置也可以实现为不同的形式,例如第一通信装置通过设备的形式实现,第二通信装置通过芯片的方式实现,等等。其中,网络设备例如为基站。
为了便于介绍,在下文中,以该方法由终端装置和终端装置执行为例,也就是说,以第一通信装置是终端装置(例如称为第一终端装置)、第二通信装置也是终端装置(例如称为第二终端装置)为例。因为本实施例是以应用在图2所示的网络架构为例,因此,下文中所述的第一终端装置可以实现图2所示的网络架构中的终端设备1的功能,下文中所述的第二终端装置可以实现图2所示的网络架构中的终端设备2的功能。
S41、第一终端装置在K1个发送方向上向第二终端装置发送K2个第一参考信号,第二终端装置接收第一终端装置在K1个发送方向上发送的K2个第一参考信号,或者说,第二终端装置接收来自第一终端装置对应的K1个方向上的K2个第一参考信号。第一终端装置对应的K1个方向,是指第一终端装置的K1个发送方向,因此K2个第一参考信号是第一终端装置发送给第二终端装置的,且是通过K1个方向发送的。
关于S41的更多内容,可参考图3所示的实施例中的S31的介绍。
S42、第二终端装置确定,连续N1次,所述K1个发送方向上的波束均失败。N1为正整数。
例如,N1可以由网络设备配置,或者可以由第一终端装置配置,或者由第二终端装置配置,或者也可以通过协议规定。
连续N1次,K1个发送方向上的波束均失败,这可以认为是BFD条件所包括的内容,或者说,认为是BFD的一种条件。BFD条件可以只包括这一种,或者还可以包括其他的条件。
例如,第二终端装置在接收K2个第一参考信号后,可以对K2个第一参考信号进行测量,并根据测量结果确定K1个波束是否失败。例如测量结果为RSRP,如果一个波束中传输的第一参考信号的RSRP对应的假想PSCCH BLER大于第一阈值,则第二终端装置认为该波束失败。第一阈值例如等于如前介绍的第①个步骤的BFD条件中的阈值,或者,第一阈值可以由网络设备配置,或者可以由第一终端装置配置,或者由第二终端装置配置,或者也可以通过协议规定。
在执行S42之后,可以执行S43和S44;或者,作为一种可选的方式,在执行S43之前,还可以执行S45和S46。
S43、第二终端装置向第一终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号,第一终端装置在P3个接收方向上接收来自第二终端装置的P2个第二参考信号。P3个接收方向对应于第一终端装置的P1个发送方向,因此可以认为,P2个第二参考信号对应于第一终端装置的P1个发送方向。P1为正整数,P2为大于或等于P3的整数。
其中,P3个接收方向中的每个接收方向是第一终端装置的接收方向,P1个发送方向中的每个发送方向是第一终端装置的发送方向。P3个接收方向可以对应P3个接收波束,P1个发送方向可以对应P1个发送波束,例如,P1可以等于P3,当然P1也可以不等于P3。对于第一终端装置来说,可以支持一个或多个波束对应关系,每个波束对应关系包括一个发送波束和一个接收波束,每个波束对应关系所指示的发送波束和接收波束是一一对应的,如果P1=P3,那么P1个发送波束和P3个接收波束就可以视为P1个波束对应关系,此时第一终端装置可以视为具有波束对应(beam correspondence)性质。那么,第一终端装置通过P3个接收波束接收了P2个第二参考信号,P3个接收波束对应于P1个发送波束,则可以认为,P2个第二参考信号对应于P1个发送波束。P2个第二参考信号中的一个第二参考信号,可以用于测量这一个第二参考信号所在的第一终端装置的接收方向上的波束的质量,第一终端装置的接收方向上的波束的质量与第一终端装置的一个发送方向上的波束的质量相对应。
关于S43的更多内容,例如对于P1个发送方向的解释等,可参考图3所示的实施例中S33的相关介绍。
S44、第一终端装置对P2个第二参考信号进行测量。
例如,第一终端装置在接收P2个第二参考信号后,可以对P2个第二参考信号进行测量,获得测量结果。测量结果例如为RSRP,或者也可以是RSRQ等,具体的不做限制。
S45、第一终端装置在M1个发送方向上向第二终端装置发送M2个第三参考信号,第二终端装置接收第一终端装置在M1个发送方向上发送的M2个第三参考信号,或者说,第二终端装置接收来自第一终端装置对应的M1个方向上的M2个第三参考信号。第一终端装置对应的M1个方向,是指第一终端装置的M1个发送方向,因此M2个第三参考信号是第一终端装置发送给第二终端装置的,且是通过M1个方向发送的。
关于S45的更多内容,可参考图3所示的实施例中S35的相关介绍。
S46、第二终端装置确定,连续N2次,所述M1个发送方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接。N2为正整数。
例如,N2可以由网络设备配置,或者可以由第一终端装置配置,或者由第二终端装置配置,或者也可以通过协议规定。
连续N2次,M1个方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接,这可以认为是BFD条件所包括的内容,或者说,认为是BFD的一种条件。例如,BFD条件可以包括,连续N1次,K1个方向上的波束均失败,以及,连续N2次,M1个方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接。或者,BFD条件还可以包括其他的条件。
例如,第二终端装置在接收M2个第二参考信号后,可以对M2个第二参考信号进行测量,获得测量结果。例如测量结果为RSRP,如果一个波束中传输的第二参考信号的RSRP低于第二阈值,则第二终端装置认为该波束不可以被用来恢复通信连接。从而第二终端装置可以确定是否连续N2次M1个发送方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接。或者,测量结果也可以是RSRQ等,对此不做限制。
如果在执行S42之后直接执行S43和S44,即不执行S45和S46,那么相当于,第二终端装置在确定连续N1次K1个方向上的波束均失败后,就可以向第一终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号;或者,如果执行S42后还要执行S45和S46,之后再执行S43和S44,那么相当于,第二终端装置在确定连续N1次K1个方向上的波束均失败,以及确定连续N2次M1个方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接后,可以向第一终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号。
S47、第一终端装置根据P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,确定P1个发送方向对应的P1个波束是否可用。
第一终端装置可以根据在S44中获得的P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,确定P1个方向对应的P1个波束是否可用。测量结果例如为RSRP,如果第一终端装置确定一个RSRP大于第三阈值,则第一终端装置确定该RSRP对应的第二参考信号所对应的波束是可用的波束,否则,如果第一终端装置确定一个RSRP小于或等于第三阈值,则第一终端装置确定该RSRP对应的第二参考信号所对应的波束是不可用的波束。第三阈值可以由网络设备配置,或者可以由第一终端装置配置,或者由第二终端装置配置,或者也可以通过协议规定。或者,第二参考信号的测量结果也可以是RSRQ等,具体的不做限制。
S48、第二终端装置根据P2个第二参考信号,确定P1个发送方向对应的P1个波束是否可用。
作为一种可选的实施方式,在确定P1个波束是否可用之后,第一终端装置可以向第二终端装置发送第一响应消息,可参考S49,第一响应消息用于指示P1个波束中可用的波束,或者指示P1个波束均不可用。第二终端装置接收第一响应消息后,如果第一响应消息指示P1个波束中可用的波束,第二终端装置可以根据第一响应消息确定P1个波束中有哪些波束可用,或者,如果第一响应消息指示P1个波束均不可用,则第二终端装置根据第一响应消息可以确定P1个波束均不可用。第一响应消息如果指示P1个波束中可用的波束,一种方式为,第一响应消息包括P1个波束中可用的波束的标识,波束的标识例如为波束的ID或者波束的编号等,第二终端装置根据第一响应消息所包括的波束的标识就可以确定这些标识所对应的波束是可用的波束。
或者,作为另一种可选的实施方式,在确定P1个波束是否可用之后,如果P1个波束中有可用的波束,则第一终端装置可以向第二终端装置发送第一响应消息,第一响应消息用于指示P1个波束中可用的波束。第二终端装置接收第一响应消息后,可以根据第一响应消息确定P1个波束中有哪些波束可用。而如果P1个波束中没有可用的波束,则第一终端装置可以不向第二终端装置发送第一响应消息。如果第二终端装置未接收来自第一终端装置的第一响应消息,也就可以确定P1个波束均不可用。
其中,如果第一终端装置和第二终端装置处于同一个网络设备的覆盖范围内,则第一终端装置可以将第一响应消息发送给该网络设备,该网络设备接收该第一响应消息后,可以将该第一响应消息转发给第二终端装置。例如,第一终端装置可以将第一响应消息承载在PUCCH或PUSCH中发送给该网络设备。或者,即使第一终端装置和第二终端装置处于同一个网络设备的覆盖范围内,第一终端装置也可以直接将第一响应消息发送给第二终端装置,无需通过网络设备中转,这样可以减小时延。如果第一终端装置和第二终端装置处于不同的网络设备的覆盖范围内,则第一终端装置可以直接将第一响应消息发送给第二终端装置,或者第一终端装置可以将第一响应消息发送给第一终端装置所在的网络设备,第一终端装置所在的网络设备将第一响应消息转发给第二终端装置所在的网络设备,第二终端装置所在的网络设备再将第一响应消息转发给第二终端装置。
如果在S47中,第一终端装置确定P1个波束中有可用的波束,那么第一终端装置可以选择可用的波束中的部分波束或全部波束作为第一终端装置的服务波束,相当于完成了波束恢复。对于第二终端装置来说也是同样,如果在S48中,第二终端装置确定P1个波束中有可用的波束,那么第二终端装置可以确定可用的波束中的部分波束或全部波束为第一终端装置的服务波束,相当于完成了波束恢复。例如,究竟选择哪些可用的波束作为新的服务波束,可以由第一终端装置选择,第一终端装置选择后可以向第二终端装置发送第三消息,第三消息用于指示新的服务波束,例如第三消息可以包括新的服务波束的标识。第二终端装置接收第三消息后,就可以确定哪些波束作为了第一终端装置的新的服务波束。
其中,如果第一终端装置和第二终端装置处于同一个网络设备的覆盖范围内,则第一终端装置可以将第三消息发送给该网络设备,该网络设备接收该第三消息后,可以将该第三消息转发给第二终端装置。例如,第一终端装置可以将第三消息承载在PUCCH或PUSCH中发送给该网络设备。或者,即使第一终端装置和第二终端装置处于同一个网络设备的覆盖范围内,第一终端装置也可以直接将第三消息发送给第二终端装置,无需通过网络设备中转,这样可以减小时延。如果第一终端装置和第二终端装置处于不同的网络设备的覆盖范围内,则第一终端装置可以直接将第三消息发送给第二终端装置,或者第一终端装置可 以将第三消息发送给第一终端装置所在的网络设备,第一终端装置所在的网络设备将第三消息转发给第二终端装置所在的网络设备,第二终端装置所在的网络设备再将第三消息转发给第二终端装置。
而如果在S47中,第一终端装置确定P1个波束均不可用,则第一终端装置可以告知第一终端装置的高层,第一终端装置的高层可以进行波束恢复。同理,如果在S48中,第二终端装置确定P1个波束均不可用,则第二终端装置可以告知第二终端装置的高层,第二终端装置的高层可以进行波束恢复。具体的,第二终端装置的高层可以与第一终端装置的高层进行配合,以进行波束恢复。具体的,第一终端装置的高层可以与第二终端装置的高层进行配合,以进行波束恢复。例如,第一终端装置的高层和第二终端装置的高层可以采用RLM等方式来进行波束恢复。终端装置的高层例如包括如下的一层或多层:RRC层,MAC层,RLC层,或,PDCP层。例如,终端装置的高层包括RRC层;或者,终端装置的高层包括RLC层和PDCP层;或者,终端装置的高层包括MAC层;或者,终端装置的高层包括MAC层、RLC层、PDCP层和RRC层,等等。
在本申请实施例中,第一终端装置可以向第二终端装置发送第一参考信号,从而第一终端装置可以确定K1个发送方向上的波束是否失败,相当于提供了一种在SL通信中进行波束失败检测的机制。另外,如果第二终端装置确定K1个发送方向上的波束失败,则第二终端装置还可以向第一终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号,第一终端装置在P3个接收方向上接收来自第二终端装置的P2个第二参考信号,可以理解为,K1个发送方向是第一终端装置的服务波束对应的方向,而P3个接收方向是第一终端装置支持的所有接收方向中的部分或全部。对于第一终端装置来说,可以支持一个或多个波束对应关系,每个波束对应关系包括一个发送波束和一个接收波束,每个波束对应关系所指示的发送波束和接收波束是一一对应的,因此P3个接收波束可以对应于第一终端装置的P1个发送波束,那么,P3个接收方向对应于第一终端装置的P1个发送方向。P1个发送方向所包括的方向的个数可以大于K1个发送方向所包括的方向的个数,也就是说,如果K1个发送方向上的波束失败,则第一终端装置可以继续确定更多个方向(即P1个发送方向)上是否有可用的波束,而P1个发送方向上有可用波束的可能性会大于K1个发送方向上有可用波束的可能性,提高了获得可用波束的可能性。通过这种方式,尽量通过物理层确定可用波束,或者说通过物理层对波束进行恢复,无需通过高层来恢复波束,提高了波束恢复的效率,也减小了因波束失败而导致的业务时延。
在图3所示的实施例或图4所示的实施例中,BFD条件可以包括条件1,或者可以包括条件1和条件2。其中,条件1为,连续N1次,K1个方向上的波束均失败;条件2为,连续N2次,M1个方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接。在BFD条件包括条件1和条件2的情况下,图3所示的实施例和图4所示的实施例介绍的都是在同时满足条件1和条件2的情况下的处理方式。而还有一种可能,只满足条件1,不满足条件2。为此,本申请实施例提供第三种通信方法,用于介绍在满足条件1而不满足条件2时的处理方式。请参见图4,为该方法的流程图。
在下文的介绍过程中,以该方法应用于图2所示的网络架构为例。另外,该方法可由两个通信装置执行,这两个通信装置例如为第一通信装置和第二通信装置。其中,第一通信装置或第二通信装置,可以是网络设备或能够支持网络设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置,或者可以是终端设备或能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置,当 然还可以是其他通信装置,例如芯片。且对于第一通信装置或第二通信装置的实现方式均不做限制,例如这两个通信装置可以实现为相同的形式,例如均通过设备的形式实现,或者这两个通信装置也可以实现为不同的形式,例如第一通信装置通过设备的形式实现,第二通信装置通过芯片的方式实现,等等。其中,网络设备例如为基站。
为了便于介绍,在下文中,以该方法由终端装置和终端装置执行为例,也就是说,以第一通信装置是终端装置(例如称为第一终端装置)、第二通信装置也是终端装置(例如称为第二终端装置)为例。因为本实施例是以应用在图2所示的网络架构为例,因此,下文中所述的第一终端装置可以实现图2所示的网络架构中的终端设备1的功能,下文中所述的第二终端装置可以实现图2所示的网络架构中的终端设备2的功能。
S501、第一终端装置在K1个发送方向上向第二终端装置发送K2个第一参考信号,第二终端装置接收第一终端装置在K1个发送方向上发送的K2个第一参考信号。或者说,第二终端装置接收来自第一终端装置对应的K1个方向上的K2个第一参考信号。第一终端装置对应的K1个方向,是指第一终端装置的K1个发送方向,因此K2个第一参考信号是第一终端装置发送给第二终端装置的,且是通过K1个方向发送的。
关于S501的更多介绍,可参考图3所示的实施例中的S31。
S502、第二终端装置确定,连续N1次所述K1个发送方向上的波束均失败的条件1成立。或者说,第二终端装置确定,连续N1次,所述K1个发送方向上的波束均失败。
例如,N1可以由网络设备配置,或者可以由第一终端装置配置,或者由第二终端装置配置,或者也可以通过协议规定。N1为正整数。
第二终端装置在接收K2个第一参考信号后,可以对K2个第一参考信号进行测量,并根据测量结果确定K1个波束是否失败。例如测量结果为RSRP,如果一个波束中传输的第一参考信号的RSRP对应的假想PSCCH BLER大于第一阈值,则第二终端装置认为该波束失败。通过这种方式,第二终端装置可以确定是否连续N1次,K1个发送方向上的波束均失败。第一阈值例如等于如前介绍的第①个步骤中BFD条件中的阈值,或者,第一阈值可以由网络设备配置,或者可以由第一终端装置配置,或者由第二终端装置配置,或者也可以通过协议规定。
在本申请实施例中,例如第二终端装置确定连续N1次K1个发送方向上的波束均失败的条件1成立。
S503、第一终端装置在M1个发送方向上向第二终端装置发送M2个第三参考信号,第二终端装置接收第一终端装置在M1个发送方向上发送的M2个第三参考信号,或者说,第二终端装置接收来自第一终端装置对应的M1个方向上的M2个第三参考信号。第一终端装置对应的M1个方向,是指第一终端装置的M1个发送方向,因此M2个第三参考信号是第一终端装置发送给第二终端装置的,且是通过M1个方向发送的。
S501可以发生在S503之前,或者,S501可以发生在S503之后,或者,S501和S503可以同时发生。
关于S503的更多介绍,可参考图3所示的实施例中的S35。
S504、第二终端装置确定,连续N2次,所述M1个发送方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接的条件不成立。或者说,第二终端装置确定,所述M1个发送方向上的波束可以被用来恢复通信连接。N2为正整数。
N2可以由网络设备配置,或者可以由第一终端装置配置,或者由第二终端装置配置, 或者也可以通过协议规定。
第二终端装置在接收M2个第二参考信号后,可以对M2个第二参考信号进行测量,并根据测量结果确定M1个波束是否可以被用来恢复通信连接。例如测量结果为RSRP,如果一个波束中传输的第二参考信号的RSRP低于第二阈值,则第二终端装置认为该波束不可以被用来恢复通信连接。通过这种方式,第二终端装置可以确定是否连续N2次,M1个发送方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接。第二阈值例如等于如前介绍的第②个步骤中的阈值,或者,第二阈值可以由网络设备配置,或者可以由第一终端装置配置,或者由第二终端装置配置,或者也可以通过协议规定。
在本申请实施例中,例如第二终端装置确定连续N2次M1个发送方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接的条件不成立。
S505、第二终端装置向第一终端装置发送BFRR,第一终端装置接收来自第二终端装置的BFRR。
如果确定连续N1次K1个方向上的波束均失败的条件1成立,以及连续N2次M1个发送方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接的条件2不成立,第二终端装置可以向第一终端装置发送BFRR,第一终端装置可以接收来自第二终端装置的BFRR。在这种情况下,BFRR可以指示连续N1次K1个发送方向上的波束均失败的条件成立,以及指示,连续N2次M1个发送方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接的条件不成立。第一终端装置只要接收了BFRR,就可以确定连续N1次,K1个发送方向上的波束均失败,以及确定,连续N2次M1个发送方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接的条件不成立。关于第一终端装置向第二终端装置发送BFRR的方式等内容,可参考S32中的相关介绍。
S506、第二终端装置确定未接收第二响应消息,第二终端装置向第一终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号,第一终端装置在P3个接收方向上接收来自第二终端装置的P2个第二参考信号。第二响应消息可以是BFRR的响应消息。
P3个接收方向对应于第一终端装置的P1个发送方向,因此可以认为,P2个第二参考信号对应于第一终端装置的P1个发送方向。P1为正整数,P2为大于或等于P3的整数。
关于S506的更多内容,可参考图4所示的实施例中的S43的相关介绍。
S507、第一终端装置对P2个第二参考信号进行测量。
关于S507的更多内容,可参考图4所示的实施例中的S44的相关介绍。
S508、第一终端装置根据P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,确定P1个发送方向对应的P1个波束是否可用。
关于S508的更多内容,可参考图4所示的实施例中的S47的相关介绍。
S509、第二终端装置根据P2个第二参考信号,确定P1个发送方向对应的P1个波束是否可用。
作为一种可选的实施方式,在确定P1个波束是否可用之后,还可以执行S510,在S510中,第一终端装置可以向第二终端装置发送第一响应消息,第一响应消息用于指示P1个波束中可用的波束,或者指示P1个波束均不可用。第二终端装置接收第一响应消息后,如果第一响应消息指示P1个波束中可用的波束,第二终端装置可以根据第一响应消息确定P1个波束中有哪些波束可用,或者,如果第一响应消息指示P1个波束均不可用,则第二终端装置根据第一响应消息可以确定P1个波束均不可用。第一响应消息如果指示P1个波束中可用的波束,一种方式为,第一响应消息包括P1个波束中可用的波束的标识,波束的标识例如 为波束的ID或者波束的编号等,第二终端装置根据第一响应消息所包括的波束的标识就可以确定这些标识所对应的波束是可用的波束。
或者,作为另一种可选的实施方式,在确定P1个波束是否可用之后,如果P1个波束中有可用的波束,则第一终端装置可以向第二终端装置发送第一响应消息,第一响应消息用于指示P1个波束中可用的波束。第二终端装置接收第一响应消息后,可以根据第一响应消息确定P1个波束中有哪些波束可用。而如果P1个波束中没有可用的波束,则第一终端装置可以不向第二终端装置发送第一响应消息。如果第二终端装置未接收来自第一终端装置的第一响应消息,也就可以确定P1个波束均不可用。
关于S509的更多内容,可参考图4所示的实施例中的S48的相关介绍。
在本申请实施例中,第一终端装置可以向第二终端装置发送第一参考信号和第二参考信号,从而第一终端装置可以确定K1个发送方向上的波束是否失败,以及确定M1个发送方向上的波束是否可以被用来恢复通信连接,相当于提供了一种在SL通信中进行波束失败检测的机制。另外,如果第二终端装置确定K1个发送方向上的波束失败,以及M1个发送方向上的波束可以被用来恢复通信连接,则向第一终端装置发送BFRR来使得第一终端装置将服务波束从K1个发送方向对应的发送波束改变为M1个发送方向对应的发送波束中可以被用来恢复通信连接的发送波束。如果第一终端装置确定没有收到第一终端装置针对该BFRR发送的第二响应消息,则第二终端装置可以暂时不通知高层,而是向第一终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号,第一终端装置在P3个接收方向上接收来自第二终端装置的P2个第二参考信号。可以理解为,K1个发送方向是第一终端装置的服务波束对应的方向,而P3个接收方向是第一终端装置支持的所有接收方向中的部分或全部。对于第一终端装置来说,可以支持一个或多个波束对应关系,每个波束对应关系包括一个发送波束和一个接收波束,每个波束对应关系里的发送波束和接收波束是一一对应的。因此P3个接收波束可以对应于第一终端装置的P1个发送波束,那么,P3个接收方向对应于第一终端装置的P1个发送方向。P1个方向所包括的方向的个数可以大于K1个方向的个数,也就是说,如果K1个方向上的波束失败,则第一终端装置可以继续确定更多个方向(即P1个方向)上是否有可用的波束,而P1个方向上有可用波束的可能性会大于K1个方向上有可用波束的可能性,提高了获得可用波束的可能性。通过这种方式,尽量通过物理层确定可用波束,或者说通过物理层对波束进行恢复,无需通过高层来恢复波束,提高了波束恢复的效率,也减小了因波束失败而导致的业务时延。
图5所示的实施例所提供的方法是在第二终端设备确定满足条件1而不满足条件2时的一种处理方式。下面,本申请实施例再提供第四种通信方法,用于介绍在第一终端设备确定满足条件1而不满足条件2时的另一种处理方式。请参见图6,为该方法的流程图。
在下文的介绍过程中,以该方法应用于图2所示的网络架构为例。另外,该方法可由两个通信装置执行,这两个通信装置例如为第一通信装置和第二通信装置。其中,第一通信装置或第二通信装置,可以是网络设备或能够支持网络设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置,或者可以是终端设备或能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置,当然还可以是其他通信装置,例如芯片。且对于第一通信装置或第二通信装置的实现方式均不做限制,例如这两个通信装置可以实现为相同的形式,例如均通过设备的形式实现,或者这两个通信装置也可以实现为不同的形式,例如第一通信装置通过设备的形式实现,第二通信装置通过芯片的方式实现,等等。其中,网络设备例如为基站。
为了便于介绍,在下文中,以该方法由终端装置和终端装置执行为例,也就是说,以第一通信装置是终端装置(例如称为第一终端装置)、第二通信装置也是终端装置(例如称为第二终端装置)为例。因为本实施例是以应用在图2所示的网络架构为例,因此,下文中所述的第一终端装置可以实现图2所示的网络架构中的终端设备1的功能,下文中所述的第二终端装置可以实现图2所示的网络架构中的终端设备2的功能。
S61、第一终端装置在K1个发送方向上向第二终端装置发送K2个第一参考信号,第二终端装置接收第一终端装置在K1个发送方向上发送的K2个第一参考信号。或者说,第二终端装置接收来自第一终端装置对应的K1个方向上的K2个第一参考信号。第一终端装置对应的K1个方向,是指第一终端装置的K1个发送方向,因此K2个第一参考信号是第一终端装置发送给第二终端装置的,且是通过K1个方向发送的。
关于S61的更多介绍,可参考图3所示的实施例中的S31。
S62、第一终端装置确定,连续N1次,所述K1个发送方向上的波束均失败的条件(条件1)成立。或者说,第一终端装置确定,连续N1次,所述K1个发送方向上的波束均失败。
例如,N1可以由网络设备配置,或者可以由第一终端装置配置,或者由第二终端装置配置,或者也可以通过协议规定。N1为正整数。
例如,第一终端装置是根据来自第二终端装置的BFRR或K2个第二参考信号的测量结果,确定连续N1次,K1个发送方向上的波束均失败的条件1成立。
关于S62的更多介绍,可参考图3所示的实施例中的S32。
S63、第一终端装置在M1个发送方向上向第二终端装置发送M2个第三参考信号,第二终端装置接收第一终端装置在M1个发送方向上发送的M2个第三参考信号,或者说,第二终端装置接收来自第一终端装置对应的M1个方向上的M2个第三参考信号。第一终端装置对应的M1个方向,是指第一终端装置的M1个发送方向,因此M2个第三参考信号是第一终端装置发送给第二终端装置的,且是通过M1个方向发送的。
关于S63的更多介绍,可参考图3所示的实施例中的S35。
S64、第一终端装置确定,连续N2次,所述M1个发送方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接的条件(条件2)不成立。或者说,第一终端装置确定,所述M1个发送方向上的波束可以被用来恢复通信连接。N2为正整数。
N2可以由网络设备配置,或者可以由第一终端装置配置,或者由第二终端装置配置,或者也可以通过协议规定。
例如,第一终端装置是根据来自第二终端装置的BFRR或M2个第二参考信号的测量结果,确定连续N2次,M1个发送方向上的波束均不可以被用来恢复通信连接的条件2不成立。
关于S64的更多介绍,可参考图3所示的实施例中的S36。
S65、第一终端装置使用M1个发送方向中的K3个发送方向,向第二终端装置发送K4个第一参考信号,第二终端装置接收第一终端装置在K3个发送方向上发送的K4个第一参考信号。或者说,第二终端装置接收来自第一终端装置对应的K3个方向上的K4个第一参考信号。第一终端装置对应的K3个方向,是指第一终端装置的K3个发送方向,因此K4个第一参考信号是第一终端装置发送给第二终端装置的,且是通过K3个方向发送的。
其中,K3个方向均是第一终端装置的发送方向,因此,K3个方向也可以称为K3个发送方向。K3为正整数,K4可以是大于或等于K3的整数,也就是说,在K3个方向中的一个方向上,可以发送一个或多个第一参考信号。K4个第一参考信号中的一个第一参考信号可 以用于检测对应方向上的波束是否失败。
由于第一终端装置确定,所述M1个发送方向上的波束可以被用来恢复通信连接,因此使用M1个发送方向中的K3个方向上向第二终端装置发送K4个第一参考信号。K3个方向,可以对应于K3个波束,或者说对应于K3个发送波束。K3个波束,可以是第一终端装置的新服务波束,例如K3个波束中的每个波束可以用来向第二终端装置发送数据信号。例如K3个波束是第一终端装置的全部服务波束,或者是第一终端装置的部分服务波束。那么,K3个方向中的每个方向就可以是第一终端装置向第二终端装置发送数据信号的方向。
S66、第一终端装置确定,连续N1次,所述K3个方向上的波束均失败。
也就是说,第一终端装置可以尝试通过M1个方向恢复通信连接,但尝试失败。其中,S65和S66是可选的步骤。
关于S66的更多内容,可参考图3所示的实施例中的S32的相关介绍。
S67、第一终端装置在P1个方向上向第一终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号,第二终端装置接收第一终端装置在P1个方向上发送的P2个第二参考信号。第一终端装置对应的P1个方向,是指第一终端装置的P1个发送方向,因此P2个第二参考信号是第一终端装置发送给第二终端装置的,且是通过P1个方向发送的。
其中,P1个方向均是第一终端装置的发送方向,因此,P1个方向也可以称为P1个发送方向。P1和P2均为正整数,P2可以大于或等于P1,也就是说,在P1个方向中的一个方向上,可以发送一个或多个第一参考信号。
关于S67的更多内容,可参考图3所示的实施例中的S33的相关介绍。
S68、第二终端装置向第一终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,第一终端装置接收来自第二终端装置的所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果。
关于S68的更多内容,可参考图3所示的实施例中的S34的相关介绍。
S69、第一终端装置根据P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,确定P1个发送方向对应的P1个波束是否可用。
关于S69的更多内容,可参考图3所示的实施例中的S37的相关介绍。
在本申请实施例中,第一终端装置可以向第二终端装置发送第一参考信号和第二参考信号,从而第一终端装置可以确定K1个发送方向上的波束是否失败,以及确定M1个发送方向上的波束是否可以被用来恢复通信连接,相当于提供了一种在SL通信中进行波束失败检测的机制。另外,如果第二终端装置确定K1个发送方向上的波束失败,以及M1个发送方向上的波束可以被用来恢复通信连接,则可以向第一终端装置发送BFRR来使得第一终端装置将服务波束从K1个发送方向对应的发送波束改变为M1个发送方向对应的发送波束中可以被用来恢复通信连接的K3个发送波束。如果第一终端装置确定K3个波束失败,可以暂时不通知高层,而是在P1个方向上向第二终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号,第二终端装置接收来自第二终端装置的P2个第二参考信号。P1个方向所包括的方向的个数可以大于K1个方向的个数,也就是说,如果K1个方向上的波束失败,则第一终端装置可以继续确定更多个方向(即P1个方向)上是否有可用的波束,而P1个方向上有可用波束的可能性会大于K1个方向上有可用波束的可能性,提高了获得可用波束的可能性。通过这种方式,尽量通过物理层确定可用波束,或者说通过物理层对波束进行恢复,无需通过高层来恢复波束,提高了波束恢复的效率,也减小了因波束失败而导致的业务时延。
图7为本申请实施例提供的通信装置700的示意性框图。示例性地,通信装置700例 如为第一终端装置700。
第一终端装置700包括处理模块710和收发模块720。示例性地,第一终端装置700可以是终端设备,也可以是应用于终端设备中的芯片或者其他具有终端设备功能的组合器件、部件等。当第一终端装置700是终端设备时,收发模块720可以是收发器,收发器可以包括天线和射频电路等,处理模块710可以是处理器,例如基带处理器,基带处理器中可以包括一个或多个中央处理单元(central processing unit,CPU)。当第一终端装置700是具有终端设备功能的部件时,收发模块720可以是射频单元,处理模块710可以是处理器,例如基带处理器。当第一终端装置700是芯片系统时,收发模块720可以是芯片(例如基带芯片)的输入输出接口、处理模块710可以是芯片系统的处理器,可以包括一个或多个中央处理单元。应理解,本申请实施例中的处理模块710可以由处理器或处理器相关电路组件实现,收发模块720可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现。
其中,处理模块710可以用于执行图3所示的实施例中由第一终端装置所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作,例如S32、S36和S37,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块720可以用于执行图3所示的实施例中由第一终端装置所执行的全部接收操作,例如S31、S33~S35,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
或者,处理模块710可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由第一终端装置所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作,例如S507和S508,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块720可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由第一终端装置所执行的全部接收操作,例如S501、S503、S506和S510,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
或者,处理模块710可以用于执行图6所示的实施例中由第一终端装置所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作,例如S62、S64、S66和S69,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块720可以用于执行图6所示的实施例中由第一终端装置所执行的全部接收操作,例如S61、S63、S65、S67和S68,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
另外,收发模块720可以是一个功能模块,该功能模块既能完成发送操作也能完成接收操作,例如收发模块720可以用于执行图3所示的实施例、图5所示的实施例或图6所示的实施例中由第一终端装置所执行的全部发送操作和接收操作,例如,在执行发送操作时,可以认为收发模块720是发送模块,而在执行接收操作时,可以认为收发模块720是接收模块;或者,收发模块720也可以是两个功能模块,收发模块可以视为这两个功能模块的统称,这两个功能模块分别为发送模块和接收模块,发送模块用于完成发送操作,例如发送模块可以用于执行图3所示的实施例、图5所示的实施例或图6所示的实施例中由第一终端装置所执行的全部发送操作,接收模块用于完成接收操作,例如接收模块可以用于执行图3所示的实施例、图5所示的实施例或图6所示的实施例中由第一终端装置所执行的全部接收操作。
其中,收发模块720,用于在K1个方向上向第二终端装置发送K2个第一参考信号,所述K1个方向中的每个方向是第一终端装置700向所述第二终端装置发送数据信号的方向,所述K2个第一参考信号中的一个第一参考信号用于检测所述一个第一参考信号所在方向上的波束是否失败,K1和K2均为正整数,且K2大于或等于K1;
处理模块710,用于确定,连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败,N1为正整数;
收发模块720,还用于在P1个方向上向所述第二终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号,所述P2个第二参考信号中的一个第二参考信号用于测量所述一个第一参考信号所在方向上的波束的质量,所述P1个方向为第一终端装置700支持的部分发送方向或全部发送方向,P1为正整数,P2为大于或等于P1的整数;
收发模块720,还用于接收来自所述第二终端装置的所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果;
处理模块710,还用于根据所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,确定所述P1个方向对应的P1个波束是否可用。
作为一种可选的实施方式,
收发模块720,还用于向所述第二终端装置发送第二消息,所述第二消息用于指示所述P1个波束中可用的波束,或指示所述P1个波束均不可用;或,
处理模块710,还用于在确定所述P1个波束均不可用时,控制收发模块720不向所述第二终端装置发送第二消息。
作为一种可选的实施方式,处理模块710,还用于通过第一终端装置700的RRC层恢复所述P1个波束中的一个或多个。
作为一种可选的实施方式,处理模块710用于通过如下方式确定,连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败:
通过收发模块720接收来自所述第二终端装置的第一消息,所述第一消息用于指示所述第二终端装置对所述K2个第一参考信号的测量结果;
根据所述K2个第一参考信号的测量结果,确定连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败。
作为一种可选的实施方式,
收发模块720,还用于在M1个方向上向所述第二终端装置发送M2个第三参考信号,所述M2个第三参考信号中的一个第三参考信号用于检测所述一个第三参考信号所在方向上的波束是否可被用来恢复通信连接,M1为正整数,M2为大于或等于M1的整数;
处理模块710,还用于确定,连续N2次,所述M1个方向上的波束均不可被用来恢复通信连接,N2为正整数。
作为一种可选的实施方式,处理模块用于通过如下方式确定,连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败,以及确定,连续N2次,所述M1个方向上的波束均不可被用来恢复通信连接:
通过收发模块720接收来自所述第二终端装置的BFRR,所述BFRR指示连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败,以及连续N2次,所述M1个方向上的波束均不可被用来恢复通信连接。
作为一种可选的实施方式,收发模块720,还用于向所述第二终端装置发送第二响应消息,所述第二响应消息为所述BFRR的响应消息。
图8为本申请实施例提供的通信装置800的示意性框图。示例性地,通信装置800例如为第二终端装置800。
第二终端装置800包括处理模块810和收发模块820。示例性地,第二终端装置800可以是终端设备,也可以是应用于终端设备中的芯片或者其他具有终端设备功能的组合器件、部件等。当第二终端装置800是终端设备时,收发模块820可以是收发器,收发器可 以包括天线和射频电路等,处理模块810可以是处理器,处理器中可以包括一个或多个CPU。当第二终端装置800是具有终端设备功能的部件时,收发模块820可以是射频单元,处理模块810可以是处理器,例如基带处理器。当第二终端装置800是芯片系统时,收发模块820可以是芯片(例如基带芯片)的输入输出接口、处理模块810可以是芯片系统的处理器,可以包括一个或多个中央处理单元。应理解,本申请实施例中的处理模块810可以由处理器或处理器相关电路组件实现,收发模块820可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现。
其中,处理模块810可以用于执行图3所示的实施例中由第二终端装置所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作,例如对P2个第二参考信号进行测量等,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块820可以用于执行图3所示的实施例中由第二终端装置所执行的全部接收操作,例如S31、S33~S35,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
或者,处理模块810可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由第二终端装置所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作,例如S502、S504和S509,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块820可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由第二终端装置所执行的全部接收操作,例如S501、S503、S506和S510,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
或者,处理模块810可以用于执行图6所示的实施例中由第二终端装置所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作,例如S62、S64、S66和S69,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块820可以用于执行图6所示的实施例中由第二终端装置所执行的全部接收操作,例如S61、S63、S65、S67和S68,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
另外,收发模块820可以是一个功能模块,该功能模块既能完成发送操作也能完成接收操作,例如收发模块820可以用于执行图3所示的实施例、图5所示的实施例或图6所示的实施例中由第二终端装置所执行的全部发送操作和接收操作,例如,在执行发送操作时,可以认为收发模块820是发送模块,而在执行接收操作时,可以认为收发模块820是接收模块;或者,收发模块820也可以是两个功能模块,收发模块可以视为这两个功能模块的统称,这两个功能模块分别为发送模块和接收模块,发送模块用于完成发送操作,例如发送模块可以用于执行图3所示的实施例、图5所示的实施例或图6所示的实施例中由第二终端装置所执行的全部发送操作,接收模块用于完成接收操作,例如接收模块可以用于执行图3所示的实施例、图5所示的实施例或图6所示的实施例中由第二终端装置所执行的全部接收操作。
其中,收发模块820,用于接收来自第一终端装置对应的K1个方向上的K2个第一参考信号,所述K1个方向中的每个方向是所述第一终端装置向第二终端装置800发送数据信号的方向,所述K2个第一参考信号中的一个第一参考信号用于检测所述一个第一参考信号所在方向上的波束是否失败,K1为正整数,K2为大于或等于K1的整数;
收发模块820,还用于向所述第一终端装置发送第一消息或BFRR,所述第一消息用于指示第二终端装置800对所述K2个第一参考信号的测量结果,所述BFRR用于指示连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败;
收发模块820,还用于接收来自所述第一终端装置对应的P1个方向上的P2个第二参考信号,所述P2个第二参考信号中的一个第二参考信号用于测量所述一个第二参考信号 所在方向上的波束的质量,所述P1个方向为所述第一终端装置支持的全部发送方向或部分发送方向,P1为正整数,P2为大于或等于P1的整数;
处理模块810,用于对所述P2个第二参考信号进行测量;
收发模块820,还用于向所述第一终端装置发送所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果用于确定所述P1个波束中是否有可用的波束。
作为一种可选的实施方式,
收发模块820,还用于接收来自所述第一终端装置的第二消息,所述第二消息用于指示所述P1个波束中可用的波束,或指示所述P1个波束均不可用;或,
处理模块810,还用于在确定收发模块820未接收来自所述第一终端装置的第二消息时,确定所述P1个波束均不可用。
作为一种可选的实施方式,收发模块820,还用于通过第二终端装置800的RRC层恢复所述P1个波束中的一个或多个。
作为一种可选的实施方式,收发模块820,还用于在M1个方向上接收来自所述第一终端装置的M2个第三参考信号,所述第三参考信号用于检测对应方向上的波束是否可被用来恢复通信连接,M1为正整数,M2为大于或等于M1的整数。
作为一种可选的实施方式,收发模块820,还用于向所述第一终端装置发送第四消息或所述BFRR,所述第四消息用于指示第二终端装置800对所述M2个第三参考信号的测量结果,所述BFRR还用于指示,连续N2次,所述M1个方向上的波束均不可被用来恢复通信连接。
图9为本申请实施例提供的通信装置900的示意性框图。示例性地,通信装置900例如为第一终端装置900。
第一终端装置900包括处理模块910和收发模块920。示例性地,第一终端装置900可以是终端设备,也可以是应用于终端设备中的芯片或者其他具有终端设备功能的组合器件、部件等。当第一终端装置900是终端设备时,收发模块920可以是收发器,收发器可以包括天线和射频电路等,处理模块910可以是处理器,例如基带处理器,基带处理器中可以包括一个或多个CPU。当第一终端装置900是具有终端设备功能的部件时,收发模块920可以是射频单元,处理模块910可以是处理器,例如基带处理器。当也终端装置900是芯片系统时,收发模块920可以是芯片(例如基带芯片)的输入输出接口、处理模块910可以是芯片系统的处理器,可以包括一个或多个中央处理单元。应理解,本申请实施例中的处理模块910可以由处理器或处理器相关电路组件实现,收发模块920可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现。
其中,处理模块910可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由第一终端装置所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作,例如S44和S47,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块920可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由第一终端装置所执行的全部接收操作,例如S41、S43、S45和S49,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
另外,收发模块920可以是一个功能模块,该功能模块既能完成发送操作也能完成接收操作,例如收发模块920可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由第一终端装置所执行的全部发送操作和接收操作,例如,在执行发送操作时,可以认为收发模块920是发送模块,而在执行接收操作时,可以认为收发模块920是接收模块;或者,收发模块920也可以是两个功能模块,收发模块可以视为这两个功能模块的统称,这两个功能模块分别为发送模 块和接收模块,发送模块用于完成发送操作,例如发送模块可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由第一终端装置所执行的全部发送操作,接收模块用于完成接收操作,例如接收模块可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由第一终端装置所执行的全部接收操作。
其中,收发模块920,用于在K1个发送方向上向第二终端装置发送K2个第一参考信号,所述K1个方向中的每个方向是第一终端装置900向所述第二终端装置发送数据信号的方向,所述K2个第一参考信号中的一个第一参考信号用于检测所述一个第一参考信号所在的发送方向上的波束是否失败,K1和K2均为正整数,K2大于或等于K1;
收发模块920,还用于在P3个接收方向上接收来自所述第二终端装置的P2个第二参考信号,所述P3个接收方向对应于第一终端装置900的P1个发送方向,所述P2个第二参考信号中的一个第二参考信号用于测量所述一个第二参考信号所在的第一终端装置900的接收方向上的波束的质量,第一终端装置900的接收方向上的波束的质量对应于第一终端装置900的一个发送方向上的波束的质量,所述P1个发送方向为第一终端装置900支持的部分发送方向或全部发送方向,P1为正整数,P2为大于或等于P3的整数;
处理模块910,用于对所述P2个第二参考信号进行测量;
处理模块910,还用于根据所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,确定所述P1个发送方向对应的P1个波束是否可用。
作为一种可选的实施方式,
收发模块920,还用于向所述第二终端装置发送第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息用于指示所述P1个波束中可用的波束,或用于指示所述P1个波束均不可用;或,
处理模块910,还用于在确定所述P1个波束均不可用时,控制收发模块920不向所述第二终端装置发送第一响应消息。
作为一种可选的实施方式,收发模块920,还用于在M1个发送方向上向所述第二终端装置发送M2个第三参考信号,所述M2个第三参考信号中的一个第三参考信号用于检测所述一个第三参考信号所在的发送方向上的波束是否可被用来恢复通信连接,M1为正整数,M2为大于或等于M1的整数。
作为一种可选的实施方式,处理模块910,还用于通过第一终端装置900的RRC层恢复所述P1个波束中的一个或多个。
图10为本申请实施例提供的通信装置1000的示意性框图。示例性地,通信装置1000例如为第二终端装置1000。
第二终端装置1000包括处理模块1010和收发模块1020。示例性地,第二终端装置900可以是终端设备,也可以是应用于终端设备中的芯片或者其他具有终端设备功能的组合器件、部件等。当第二终端装置1000是终端设备时,收发模块1020可以是收发器,收发器可以包括天线和射频电路等,处理模块1010可以是处理器,例如基带处理器,基带处理器中可以包括一个或多个CPU。当第二终端装置1000是具有终端设备功能的部件时,收发模块1020可以是射频单元,处理模块1010可以是处理器,例如基带处理器。当也终端装置1000是芯片系统时,收发模块1020可以是芯片(例如基带芯片)的输入输出接口、处理模块1010可以是芯片系统的处理器,可以包括一个或多个中央处理单元。应理解,本申请实施例中的处理模块1010可以由处理器或处理器相关电路组件实现,收发模块1020可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现。
其中,处理模块1010可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由第二终端装置所执行的除 了收发操作之外的全部操作,例如S42和S46,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块1020可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由第二终端装置所执行的全部接收操作,例如S41、S43、S45和S49,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
另外,收发模块1020可以是一个功能模块,该功能模块既能完成发送操作也能完成接收操作,例如收发模块1020可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由第二终端装置所执行的全部发送操作和接收操作,例如,在执行发送操作时,可以认为收发模块1020是发送模块,而在执行接收操作时,可以认为收发模块1020是接收模块;或者,收发模块1020也可以是两个功能模块,收发模块可以视为这两个功能模块的统称,这两个功能模块分别为发送模块和接收模块,发送模块用于完成发送操作,例如发送模块可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由第二终端装置所执行的全部发送操作,接收模块用于完成接收操作,例如接收模块可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由第二终端装置所执行的全部接收操作。
其中,收发模块1020,用于接收来自第一终端装置对应的K1个发送方向上的K2个第一参考信号,所述K1个方向中的每个方向是所述第一终端装置向第二终端装置1000发送数据信号的方向,所述K2个第一参考信号中的一个第一参考信号用于检测所述一个第一参考信号所在的发送方向上的波束是否失败,K1为正整数,K2为大于或等于K1的整数;
处理模块1010,用于确定,连续N1次,所述K1个发送方向上的波束均失败,N1为正整数;
收发模块1020,还用于向所述第一终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号,所述P2个参考信号对应于所述第一终端装置的P1个发送方向,所述P1个发送方向为所述第一终端装置支持的部分发送方向或全部发送方向,所述P2个第二参考信号中的一个第二参考信号用于测量所述一个第二参考信号所在的第一终端装置的接收方向上的波束的质量,所述第一终端装置的接收方向上的波束的质量对应于第一终端装置的一个发送方向上的波束的质量,P1为正整数,P2为大于或等于P3的整数;
处理模块1010,还用于根据所述P2个第二参考信号,确定所述P1个发送方向对应的P1个波束是否可用。
作为一种可选的实施方式,处理模块1010用于通过如下方式根据所述P2个第二参考信号,确定所述P1个发送方向对应的P1个波束是否可用:
通过收发模块1020接收来自所述第一终端装置的第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息用于指示所述P1个波束中可用的波束,或用于指示所述P1个波束均不可用;或,
确定收发模块1020未接收来自所述第一终端装置的第一响应消息,确定所述P1个波束均不可用。
作为一种可选的实施方式,
收发模块1020,还用于接收来自所述第一终端装置对应的M1个发送方向上的M2个第三参考信号,所述M2个第三参考信号中的一个第三参考信号用于检测所述一个第三参考信号所在的发送方向上的波束是否可被用来恢复通信连接,M1为正整数,M2为大于或等于M1的整数;
处理模块1010,还用于确定,连续N2次,所述M1个发送方向上的波束均不可被用来恢复通信连接,N2为正整数。
作为一种可选的实施方式,处理模块1010,还用于通过第二终端装置1000的RRC层 恢复所述P1个波束中的一个或多个。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置,该通信装置可以是终端设备也可以是电路。该通信装置可以用于执行上述方法实施例中由终端设备所执行的动作。
当该通信装置为终端设备时,图11示出了一种简化的终端设备的结构示意图。便于理解和图示方便,图11中,终端设备以手机作为例子。如图11所示,终端设备包括处理器、存储器、射频电路、天线以及输入输出装置。处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据等。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。射频电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置,例如触摸屏、显示屏,键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。需要说明的是,有些种类的终端设备可以不具有输入输出装置。
当需要发送数据时,处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后,输出基带信号至射频电路,射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端设备时,射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号,将射频信号转换为基带信号,并将基带信号输出至处理器,处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。为便于说明,图11中仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的终端设备产品中,可以存在一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。存储器可以是独立于处理器设置,也可以是与处理器集成在一起,本申请实施例对此不做限制。
在本申请实施例中,可以将具有收发功能的天线和射频电路视为终端设备的收发单元(收发单元可以是一个功能单元,该功能单元能够实现发送功能和接收功能;或者,收发单元也可以包括两个功能单元,分别为能够实现接收功能的接收单元和能够实现发送功能的发送单元),将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备的处理单元。如图11所示,终端设备包括收发单元1110和处理单元1120。收发单元也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等。处理单元也可以称为处理器,处理单板,处理模块、处理装置等。可选的,可以将收发单元1110中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元,将收发单元1110中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元,即收发单元1110包括接收单元和发送单元。收发单元有时也可以称为收发机、收发器、或收发电路等。接收单元有时也可以称为接收机、接收器、或接收电路等。发送单元有时也可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。
应理解,收发单元1110用于执行上述方法实施例中第一终端装置侧的发送操作和接收操作,处理单元1120用于执行上述方法实施例中第一终端装置上除了收发操作之外的其他操作。
例如,在一种实现方式中,处理单元1120可以用于执行图3所示的实施例中由第一终端装置所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作,例如S32、S36和S37,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发单元1110可以用于执行图3所示的实施例中由第一终端装置所执行的全部接收操作,例如S31、S33~S35,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
又例如,在一种实现方式中,处理单元1120可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由第一终端装置所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作,例如S507和S508,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发单元1110可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由第一终端装 置所执行的全部接收操作,例如S501、S503、S506和S510,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
又例如,在一种实现方式中,处理单元1120可以用于执行图6所示的实施例中由第一终端装置所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作,例如S62、S64、S66和S69,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发单元1110可以用于执行图6所示的实施例中由第一终端装置所执行的全部接收操作,例如S61、S63、S65、S67和S68,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
又例如,在一种实现方式中,处理单元1120可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由第一终端装置所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作,例如S44和S47,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发单元1110可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由第一终端装置所执行的全部接收操作,例如S41、S43、S45和S49,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
或者,收发单元1110用于执行上述方法实施例中第二终端装置侧的发送操作和接收操作,处理单元1120用于执行上述方法实施例中第二终端装置上除了收发操作之外的其他操作。
例如,在一种实现方式中,处理单元1120可以用于执行图3所示的实施例中由第二终端装置所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作,例如对P2个第二参考信号进行测量等,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发单元1110可以用于执行图3所示的实施例中由第二终端装置所执行的全部接收操作,例如S31、S33~S35,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
又例如,在一种实现方式中,处理单元1120可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由第二终端装置所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作,例如S502、S504和S509,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发单元1110可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由第二终端装置所执行的全部接收操作,例如S501、S503、S506和S510,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
又例如,在一种实现方式中,处理单元1120可以用于执行图6所示的实施例中由第二终端装置所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作,例如S62、S64、S66和S69,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发单元1110可以用于执行图6所示的实施例中由第二终端装置所执行的全部接收操作,例如S61、S63、S65、S67和S68,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
又例如,在一种实现方式中,处理单元1120可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由第二终端装置所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作,例如S42和S46,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发单元1110可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由第二终端装置所执行的全部接收操作,例如S41、S43、S45和S49,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
当该通信装置为芯片类的装置或者电路时,该装置可以包括收发单元和处理单元。其中,所述收发单元可以是输入输出电路和/或通信接口;处理单元为集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路。
本实施例中的通信装置为终端设备时,可以参照图12所示的设备。作为一个例子,该设备可以完成类似于图7中处理模块710的功能。作为另一个例子,该设备可以完成类 似于图8中处理模块810的功能。作为又一个例子,该设备可以完成类似于图9中处理模块910的功能。作为再一个例子,该设备可以完成类似于图10中处理模块1010的功能。在图12中,该设备包括处理器1210,发送数据处理器1220,接收数据处理器1230。上述实施例中的处理模块710可以是图12中的该处理器1210,并完成相应的功能;上述实施例中的收发模块720可以是图12中的发送数据处理器1220,和/或接收数据处理器1230,并完成相应的功能。或者,上述实施例中的处理模块810可以是图12中的该处理器1210,并完成相应的功能;上述实施例中的收发模块820可以是图12中的发送数据处理器1220,和/或接收数据处理器1230,并完成相应的功能。或者,上述实施例中的处理模块910可以是图12中的该处理器1210,并完成相应的功能;上述实施例中的收发模块920可以是图12中的发送数据处理器1220,和/或接收数据处理器1230,并完成相应的功能。或者,上述实施例中的处理模块1010可以是图12中的该处理器1210,并完成相应的功能;上述实施例中的收发模块1020可以是图12中的发送数据处理器1220,和/或接收数据处理器1230,并完成相应的功能。虽然图12中示出了信道编码器、信道解码器,但是可以理解这些模块并不对本实施例构成限制性说明,仅是示意性的。
图13示出本实施例的另一种形式。处理装置1300中包括调制子系统、中央处理子系统、周边子系统等模块。本实施例中的通信装置可以作为其中的调制子系统。具体的,该调制子系统可以包括处理器1303,接口1304。其中,处理器1303完成上述处理模块710的功能,接口1304完成上述收发模块720的功能。或者,处理器1303完成上述处理模块810的功能,接口1304完成上述收发模块820的功能。或者,处理器1303完成上述处理模块910的功能,接口1304完成上述收发模块920的功能。或者,处理器1303完成上述处理模块1010的功能,接口1304完成上述收发模块1020的功能。作为另一种变形,该调制子系统包括存储器1306、处理器1303及存储在存储器1306上并可在处理器上运行的程序,该处理器1303执行该程序时实现上述方法实施例中终端设备侧的方法。需要注意的是,所述存储器1306可以是非易失性的,也可以是易失性的,其位置可以位于调制子系统内部,也可以位于处理装置1300中,只要该存储器1306可以连接到所述处理器1303即可。
本申请实施例提供第一通信系统。第一通信系统可以包括上述的图3所示的实施例中所涉及的第一终端装置,以及包括上述的图3所示的实施例中所涉及的第二终端装置。或者,第一通信系统可以包括上述的图5所示的实施例中所涉及的第一终端装置,以及包括上述的图5所示的实施例中所涉及的第二终端装置。或者,第一通信系统可以包括上述的图6所示的实施例中所涉及的第一终端装置,以及包括上述的图6所示的实施例中所涉及的第二终端装置。其中,第一通信系统包括的第一终端装置例如为图7中的第一终端装置700。第一通信系统包括的第二终端装置例如为图8中的第二终端装置800。
本申请实施例提供第一通信系统。第一通信系统可以包括上述的图4所示的实施例中所涉及的第一终端装置,以及包括上述的图4所示的实施例中所涉及的第二终端装置。其中,第二通信系统包括的第一终端装置例如为图9中的第一终端装置900。第二通信系统包括的第二终端装置例如为图10中的第二终端装置1000。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图3所示的实施例中与第一终端装置相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图3所示的实施例中与第二终端装置相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图4所示的实施例中与第一终端装置相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图4所示的实施例中与第二终端装置相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图5所示的实施例中与第一终端装置相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图5所示的实施例中与第二终端装置相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图6所示的实施例中与第一终端装置相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图6所示的实施例中与第二终端装置相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图3所示的实施例中与第一终端装置相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图3所示的实施例中与第二终端装置相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图4所示的实施例中与第一终端装置相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图4所示的实施例中与第二终端装置相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图5所示的实施例中与第一终端装置相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图5所示的实施例中与第二终端装置相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序, 该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图6所示的实施例中与第一终端装置相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时,所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图6所示的实施例中与第二终端装置相关的流程。
应理解,本申请实施例中提及的处理器可以是CPU,还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。
还应理解,本申请实施例中提及的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。
需要说明的是,当处理器为通用处理器、DSP、ASIC、FPGA或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件时,存储器(存储模块)集成在处理器中。
应注意,本文描述的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
应理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请实施例的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请实施例揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请实施例的保护范围之内。因此,本申请实施例的保护范围应所述以权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (43)

  1. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:
    第一终端装置在K1个方向上向第二终端装置发送K2个第一参考信号,所述K1个方向中的每个方向是所述第一终端装置向所述第二终端装置发送数据信号的方向,所述K2个第一参考信号中的一个第一参考信号用于检测所述一个第一参考信号所在方向上的波束是否失败,K1和K2均为正整数,且K2大于或等于K1;
    所述第一终端装置确定,连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败,N1为正整数;
    所述第一终端装置在P1个方向上向所述第二终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号,所述P2个第二参考信号中的一个第二参考信号用于测量所述一个第一参考信号所在方向上的波束的质量,所述P1个方向为所述第一终端装置支持的部分发送方向或全部发送方向,P1为正整数,P2为大于或等于P1的整数;
    所述第一终端装置接收来自所述第二终端装置的所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果;
    所述第一终端装置根据所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,确定所述P1个方向对应的P1个波束是否可用。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    所述第一终端装置向所述第二终端装置发送第二消息,所述第二消息用于指示所述P1个波束中可用的波束,或指示所述P1个波束均不可用;或,
    所述第一终端装置确定所述P1个波束均不可用,所述第一终端装置不向所述第二终端装置发送第二消息。
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    所述第一终端装置通过所述第一终端装置的无线资源控制RRC层恢复所述P1个波束中的一个或多个。
  4. 根据权利要求1~3任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一终端装置确定,连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败,包括:
    所述第一终端装置接收来自所述第二终端装置的第一消息,所述第一消息用于指示所述第二终端装置对所述K2个第一参考信号的测量结果;
    所述第一终端装置根据所述K2个第一参考信号的测量结果,确定连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败。
  5. 根据权利要求1~3任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    所述第一终端装置在M1个方向上向所述第二终端装置发送M2个第三参考信号,所述M2个第三参考信号中的一个第三参考信号用于检测所述一个第三参考信号所在方向上的波束是否可被用来恢复通信连接,M1为正整数,M2为大于或等于M1的整数;
    所述第一终端装置确定,连续N2次,所述M1个方向上的波束均不可被用来恢复通信连接,N2为正整数。
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一终端装置确定,连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败,以及确定,连续N2次,所述M1个方向上的波束均不可被用来恢复通信连接,包括:
    所述第一终端装置接收来自所述第二终端装置的BFRR,所述BFRR指示连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败,以及连续N2次,所述M1个方向上的波束均不可被用来恢复通信连接。
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    所述第一终端装置向所述第二终端装置发送第二响应消息,所述第二响应消息为所述BFRR的响应消息。
  8. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:
    第二终端装置接收来自第一终端装置对应的K1个方向上的K2个第一参考信号,所述K1个方向中的每个方向是所述第一终端装置向所述第二终端装置发送数据信号的方向,所述K2个第一参考信号中的一个第一参考信号用于检测所述一个第一参考信号所在方向上的波束是否失败,K1为正整数,K2为大于或等于K1的整数;
    所述第二终端装置向所述第一终端装置发送第一消息或BFRR,所述第一消息用于指示所述第二终端装置对所述K2个第一参考信号的测量结果,所述BFRR用于指示连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败;
    所述第二终端装置接收来自所述第一终端装置对应的P1个方向上的P2个第二参考信号,所述P2个第二参考信号中的一个第二参考信号用于测量所述一个第二参考信号所在方向上的波束的质量,所述P1个方向为所述第一终端装置支持的全部发送方向或部分发送方向,P1为正整数,P2为大于或等于P1的整数;
    所述第二终端装置对所述P2个第二参考信号进行测量;
    所述第二终端装置向所述第一终端装置发送所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果用于确定所述P1个波束中是否有可用的波束。
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    所述第二终端装置接收来自所述第一终端装置的第二消息,所述第二消息用于指示所述P1个波束中可用的波束,或指示所述P1个波束均不可用;或,
    所述第二终端装置未接收来自所述第一终端装置的第二消息,所述第二终端装置确定所述P1个波束均不可用。
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    所述第二终端装置通过所述第二终端装置的无线资源控制RRC层恢复所述P1个波束中的一个或多个。
  11. 根据权利要求8~10任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    所述第二终端装置在M1个方向上接收来自所述第一终端装置的M2个第三参考信号,所述第三参考信号用于检测对应方向上的波束是否可被用来恢复通信连接,M1为正整数,M2为大于或等于M1的整数。
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    所述第二终端装置向所述第一终端装置发送第四消息或所述BFRR,所述第四消息用于指示所述第二终端装置对所述M2个第三参考信号的测量结果,所述BFRR还用于指示,连续N2次,所述M1个方向上的波束均不可被用来恢复通信连接。
  13. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:
    第一终端装置在K1个发送方向上向第二终端装置发送K2个第一参考信号,所述K1个方向中的每个方向是所述第一终端装置向所述第二终端装置发送数据信号的方向,所述K2个第一参考信号中的一个第一参考信号用于检测所述一个第一参考信号所在的发送方向上的波束是否失败,K1和K2均为正整数,K2大于或等于K1;
    所述第一终端装置在P3个接收方向上接收来自所述第二终端装置的P2个第二参考信 号,所述P3个接收方向对应于所述第一终端装置的P1个发送方向,所述P2个第二参考信号中的一个第二参考信号用于测量所述一个第二参考信号所在的第一终端装置的接收方向上的波束的质量,所述第一终端装置的接收方向上的波束的质量对应于第一终端装置的一个发送方向上的波束的质量,所述P1个发送方向为所述第一终端装置支持的部分发送方向或全部发送方向,P1为正整数,P2为大于或等于P3的整数;
    所述第一终端装置对所述P2个第二参考信号进行测量;
    所述第一终端装置根据所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,确定所述P1个发送方向对应的P1个波束是否可用。
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    所述第一终端装置向所述第二终端装置发送第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息用于指示所述P1个波束中可用的波束,或用于指示所述P1个波束均不可用;或,
    所述第一终端装置确定所述P1个波束均不可用,所述第一终端装置不向所述第二终端装置发送第一响应消息。
  15. 根据权利要求13或14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    所述第一终端装置在M1个发送方向上向所述第二终端装置发送M2个第三参考信号,所述M2个第三参考信号中的一个第三参考信号用于检测所述一个第三参考信号所在的发送方向上的波束是否可被用来恢复通信连接,M1为正整数,M2为大于或等于M1的整数。
  16. 根据权利要求13~15任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    所述第一终端装置通过所述第一终端装置的无线资源控制RRC层恢复所述P1个波束中的一个或多个。
  17. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:
    第二终端装置接收来自第一终端装置对应的K1个发送方向上的K2个第一参考信号,所述K1个方向中的每个方向是所述第一终端装置向所述第二终端装置发送数据信号的方向,所述K2个第一参考信号中的一个第一参考信号用于检测所述一个第一参考信号所在的发送方向上的波束是否失败,K1为正整数,K2为大于或等于K1的整数;
    所述第二终端装置确定,连续N1次,所述K1个发送方向上的波束均失败,N1为正整数;
    所述第二终端装置向所述第一终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号,所述P2个参考信号对应于所述第一终端装置的P1个发送方向,所述P1个发送方向为所述第一终端装置支持的部分发送方向或全部发送方向,所述P2个第二参考信号中的一个第二参考信号用于测量所述一个第二参考信号所在的第一终端装置的接收方向上的波束的质量,所述第一终端装置的接收方向上的波束的质量对应于第一终端装置的一个发送方向上的波束的质量,P1为正整数,P2为大于或等于P3的整数;
    所述第二终端装置根据所述P2个第二参考信号,确定所述P1个发送方向对应的P1个波束是否可用。
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二终端装置根据所述P2个第二参考信号,确定所述P1个发送方向对应的P1个波束是否可用,包括:
    所述第二终端装置接收来自所述第一终端装置的第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息用于指示所述P1个波束中可用的波束,或用于指示所述P1个波束均不可用;或,
    所述第二终端装置未接收来自所述第一终端装置的第一响应消息,所述第二终端装置 确定所述P1个波束均不可用。
  19. 根据权利要求17或18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    所述第二终端装置接收来自所述第一终端装置对应的M1个发送方向上的M2个第三参考信号,所述M2个第三参考信号中的一个第三参考信号用于检测所述一个第三参考信号所在的发送方向上的波束是否可被用来恢复通信连接,M1为正整数,M2为大于或等于M1的整数;
    所述第二终端装置确定,连续N2次,所述M1个发送方向上的波束均不可被用来恢复通信连接,N2为正整数。
  20. 根据权利要求17~19任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    所述第二终端装置通过所述第二终端装置的无线资源控制RRC层恢复所述P1个波束中的一个或多个。
  21. 一种终端装置,其特征在于,包括:
    收发模块,用于在K1个方向上向第二终端装置发送K2个第一参考信号,所述K1个方向中的每个方向是所述终端装置向所述第二终端装置发送数据信号的方向,所述K2个第一参考信号中的一个第一参考信号用于检测所述一个第一参考信号所在方向上的波束是否失败,K1和K2均为正整数,且K2大于或等于K1;
    处理模块,用于确定,连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败,N1为正整数;
    所述收发模块,还用于在P1个方向上向所述第二终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号,所述P2个第二参考信号中的一个第二参考信号用于测量所述一个第一参考信号所在方向上的波束的质量,所述P1个方向为所述终端装置支持的部分发送方向或全部发送方向,P1为正整数,P2为大于或等于P1的整数;
    所述收发模块,还用于接收来自所述第二终端装置的所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果;
    所述处理模块,还用于根据所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,确定所述P1个方向对应的P1个波束是否可用。
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的终端装置,其特征在于,
    所述收发模块,还用于向所述第二终端装置发送第二消息,所述第二消息用于指示所述P1个波束中可用的波束,或指示所述P1个波束均不可用;或,
    所述处理模块,还用于在确定所述P1个波束均不可用时,控制所述收发模块不向所述第二终端装置发送第二消息。
  23. 根据权利要求21或22所述的终端装置,其特征在于,所述处理模块,还用于通过所述终端装置的RRC层恢复所述P1个波束中的一个或多个。
  24. 根据权利要求21~23任一项所述的终端装置,其特征在于,所述处理模块用于通过如下方式确定,连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败:
    通过所述收发模块接收来自所述第二终端装置的第一消息,所述第一消息用于指示所述第二终端装置对所述K2个第一参考信号的测量结果;
    根据所述K2个第一参考信号的测量结果,确定连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败。
  25. 根据权利要求21~23任一项所述的终端装置,其特征在于,
    所述收发模块,还用于在M1个方向上向所述第二终端装置发送M2个第三参考信号, 所述M2个第三参考信号中的一个第三参考信号用于检测所述一个第三参考信号所在方向上的波束是否可被用来恢复通信连接,M1为正整数,M2为大于或等于M1的整数;
    所述处理模块,还用于确定,连续N2次,所述M1个方向上的波束均不可被用来恢复通信连接,N2为正整数。
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的终端装置,其特征在于,所述处理模块用于通过如下方式确定,连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败,以及确定,连续N2次,所述M1个方向上的波束均不可被用来恢复通信连接:
    通过所述收发模块接收来自所述第二终端装置的BFRR,所述BFRR指示连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败,以及连续N2次,所述M1个方向上的波束均不可被用来恢复通信连接。
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的终端装置,其特征在于,所述收发模块,还用于向所述第二终端装置发送第二响应消息,所述第二响应消息为所述BFRR的响应消息。
  28. 一种终端装置,其特征在于,包括:
    收发模块,用于接收来自第一终端装置对应的K1个方向上的K2个第一参考信号,所述K1个方向中的每个方向是所述第一终端装置向所述终端装置发送数据信号的方向,所述K2个第一参考信号中的一个第一参考信号用于检测所述一个第一参考信号所在方向上的波束是否失败,K1为正整数,K2为大于或等于K1的整数;
    所述收发模块,还用于向所述第一终端装置发送第一消息或BFRR,所述第一消息用于指示所述终端装置对所述K2个第一参考信号的测量结果,所述BFRR用于指示连续N1次,所述K1个方向上的波束均失败;
    所述收发模块,还用于接收来自所述第一终端装置对应的P1个方向上的P2个第二参考信号,所述P2个第二参考信号中的一个第二参考信号用于测量所述一个第二参考信号所在方向上的波束的质量,所述P1个方向为所述第一终端装置支持的全部发送方向或部分发送方向,P1为正整数,P2为大于或等于P1的整数;
    处理模块,用于对所述P2个第二参考信号进行测量;
    所述收发模块,还用于向所述第一终端装置发送所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果用于确定所述P1个波束中是否有可用的波束。
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的终端装置,其特征在于,
    所述收发模块,还用于接收来自所述第一终端装置的第二消息,所述第二消息用于指示所述P1个波束中可用的波束,或指示所述P1个波束均不可用;或,
    所述处理模块,还用于在确定所述收发模块未接收来自所述第一终端装置的第二消息时,确定所述P1个波束均不可用。
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的终端装置,其特征在于,所述处理模块,还用于通过所述终端装置的RRC层恢复所述P1个波束中的一个或多个。
  31. 根据权利要求28~30任一项所述的终端装置,其特征在于,所述收发模块,还用于在M1个方向上接收来自所述第一终端装置的M2个第三参考信号,所述第三参考信号用于检测对应方向上的波束是否可被用来恢复通信连接,M1为正整数,M2为大于或等于M1的整数。
  32. 根据权利要求31所述的终端装置,其特征在于,所述收发模块,还用于向所述第一终端装置发送第四消息或所述BFRR,所述第四消息用于指示所述终端装置对所述M2 个第三参考信号的测量结果,所述BFRR还用于指示,连续N2次,所述M1个方向上的波束均不可被用来恢复通信连接。
  33. 一种终端装置,其特征在于,包括:
    收发模块,用于在K1个发送方向上向第二终端装置发送K2个第一参考信号,所述K1个方向中的每个方向是所述终端装置向所述第二终端装置发送数据信号的方向,所述K2个第一参考信号中的一个第一参考信号用于检测所述一个第一参考信号所在的发送方向上的波束是否失败,K1和K2均为正整数,K2大于或等于K1;
    所述收发模块,还用于在P3个接收方向上接收来自所述第二终端装置的P2个第二参考信号,所述P3个接收方向对应于所述第一终端装置的P1个发送方向,所述P2个第二参考信号中的一个第二参考信号用于测量所述一个第二参考信号所在的所述终端装置的接收方向上的波束的质量,所述第一终端装置的接收方向上的波束的质量对应于所述终端装置的一个发送方向上的波束的质量,所述P1个发送方向为所述终端装置支持的部分发送方向或全部发送方向,P1为正整数,P2为大于或等于P3的整数;
    处理模块,用于对所述P2个第二参考信号进行测量;
    所述处理模块,还用于根据所述P2个第二参考信号的测量结果,确定所述P1个发送方向对应的P1个波束是否可用。
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的终端装置,其特征在于,
    所述收发模块,还用于向所述第二终端装置发送第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息用于指示所述P1个波束中可用的波束,或用于指示所述P1个波束均不可用;或,
    所述处理模块,还用于在确定所述P1个波束均不可用时,控制所述收发模块不向所述第二终端装置发送第一响应消息。
  35. 根据权利要求33或34所述的终端装置,其特征在于,所述收发模块,还用于在M1个发送方向上向所述第二终端装置发送M2个第三参考信号,所述M2个第三参考信号中的一个第三参考信号用于检测所述一个第三参考信号所在的发送方向上的波束是否可被用来恢复通信连接,M1为正整数,M2为大于或等于M1的整数。
  36. 根据权利要求33~35任一项所述的终端装置,其特征在于,所述处理模块,还用于通过所述终端装置的RRC层恢复所述P1个波束中的一个或多个。
  37. 一种终端装置,其特征在于,包括:
    收发模块,用于接收来自第一终端装置对应的K1个发送方向上的K2个第一参考信号,所述K1个方向中的每个方向是所述第一终端装置向所述第二终端装置发送数据信号的方向,所述K2个第一参考信号中的一个第一参考信号用于检测所述一个第一参考信号所在的发送方向上的波束是否失败,K1为正整数,K2为大于或等于K1的整数;
    处理模块,用于确定,连续N1次,所述K1个发送方向上的波束均失败,N1为正整数;
    所述收发模块,还用于向所述第一终端装置发送P2个第二参考信号,所述P2个参考信号对应于所述第一终端装置的P1个发送方向,所述P1个发送方向为所述第一终端装置支持的部分发送方向或全部发送方向,所述P2个第二参考信号中的一个第二参考信号用于测量所述一个第二参考信号所在的第一终端装置的接收方向上的波束的质量,所述第一终端装置的接收方向上的波束的质量对应于第一终端装置的一个发送方向上的波束的质量,P1为正整数,P2为大于或等于P3的整数;
    所述处理模块,还用于根据所述P2个第二参考信号,确定所述P1个发送方向对应的P1个波束是否可用。
  38. 根据权利要求37所述的终端装置,其特征在于,所述处理模块用于通过如下方式根据所述P2个第二参考信号,确定所述P1个发送方向对应的P1个波束是否可用:
    通过所述收发模块接收来自所述第一终端装置的第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息用于指示所述P1个波束中可用的波束,或用于指示所述P1个波束均不可用;或,
    确定所述收发模块未接收来自所述第一终端装置的第一响应消息,确定所述P1个波束均不可用。
  39. 根据权利要求37或38所述的终端装置,其特征在于,
    所述收发模块,还用于接收来自所述第一终端装置对应的M1个发送方向上的M2个第三参考信号,所述M2个第三参考信号中的一个第三参考信号用于检测所述一个第三参考信号所在的发送方向上的波束是否可被用来恢复通信连接,M1为正整数,M2为大于或等于M1的整数;
    所述处理模块,还用于确定,连续N2次,所述M1个发送方向上的波束均不可被用来恢复通信连接,N2为正整数。
  40. 根据权利要求37~39任一项所述的终端装置,其特征在于,所述处理模块,还用于通过所述终端装置的RRC层恢复所述P1个波束中的一个或多个。
  41. 一种通信系统,其特征在于,所述通信系统包括如权利要求21~27任一项所述的终端装置,以及包括如权利要求28~32任一项所述的终端装置;或,所述通信系统包括如权利要求33~36任一项所述的终端装置,以及包括如权利要求37~40任一项所述的终端装置。
  42. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1~7中任意一项所述的方法,或者使得所述计算机执行如权利要求8~12中任意一项所述的方法,或者使得所述计算机执行如权利要求13~16中任意一项所述的方法,或者使得所述计算机执行如权利要求17~20中任意一项所述的方法。
  43. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括一个或多个处理器以及存储器,所述一个或多个处理器与存储器耦合,所述存储器用于存储指令,当所述指令被所述一个或多个处理器执行时,使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求1~7中任意一项所述的方法,或者使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求8~12中任意一项所述的方法,或者使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求13~16中任意一项所述的方法,或者使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求17~20中任意一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2019/118924 2019-11-15 2019-11-15 一种通信方法及装置 Ceased WO2021092939A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP19952901.7A EP4033852A4 (en) 2019-11-15 2019-11-15 COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS
CN201980098691.4A CN114175846B (zh) 2019-11-15 2019-11-15 一种通信方法及装置
PCT/CN2019/118924 WO2021092939A1 (zh) 2019-11-15 2019-11-15 一种通信方法及装置
US17/663,347 US12218736B2 (en) 2019-11-15 2022-05-13 Communication method and apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2019/118924 WO2021092939A1 (zh) 2019-11-15 2019-11-15 一种通信方法及装置

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/663,347 Continuation US12218736B2 (en) 2019-11-15 2022-05-13 Communication method and apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021092939A1 true WO2021092939A1 (zh) 2021-05-20

Family

ID=75911541

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/118924 Ceased WO2021092939A1 (zh) 2019-11-15 2019-11-15 一种通信方法及装置

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (1) US12218736B2 (zh)
EP (1) EP4033852A4 (zh)
CN (1) CN114175846B (zh)
WO (1) WO2021092939A1 (zh)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11457446B2 (en) * 2017-12-29 2022-09-27 Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp., Ltd. Method, terminal device and computer storage medium for beam selection based on geographical positions of terminal devices
WO2025236997A1 (zh) * 2024-05-11 2025-11-20 中信科智联科技有限公司 波束管理方法、装置、设备、存储介质及程序产品

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11736341B2 (en) * 2021-02-05 2023-08-22 Qualcomm Incorporated Beam failure indications between sidelink user equipments
US12009895B2 (en) * 2021-09-10 2024-06-11 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques for enabling beam management radio resource control parameters
WO2024211570A1 (en) * 2023-04-05 2024-10-10 Ofinno, Llc Sidelink beam management

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109005548A (zh) * 2017-06-06 2018-12-14 华为技术有限公司 一种信道质量信息的上报方法及装置
US20190110281A1 (en) * 2017-10-06 2019-04-11 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques and apparatuses for using a second link for beam failure recovery of a first link
CN110289896A (zh) * 2018-03-15 2019-09-27 索尼公司 电子装置、无线通信方法以及计算机可读介质

Family Cites Families (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN116867092A (zh) * 2017-05-15 2023-10-10 苹果公司 用于无线电链路监视的方法和装置
US10880761B2 (en) * 2017-09-11 2020-12-29 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for selecting resources to transmit a beam failure recovery request
US11184080B2 (en) * 2017-09-11 2021-11-23 Qualcomm Incorporated Radio link monitoring and beam failure recovery resource configuration and operation
CA3024596A1 (en) * 2017-11-16 2019-05-16 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Beam paging assistance
JP7059373B2 (ja) * 2017-11-17 2022-04-25 エルジー エレクトロニクス インコーポレイティド 無線通信システムにおいてビーム失敗復旧を行う方法及びそのための装置
EP3487083B1 (en) * 2017-11-17 2020-12-16 ASUSTek Computer Inc. Method and apparatus for user equipment (ue) monitoring behavior for beam recovery in a wireless communication system
US11039350B2 (en) * 2018-04-02 2021-06-15 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Beam failure recovery
EP4550885A3 (en) * 2018-09-25 2025-07-23 Ofinno, LLC Beam configuration for secondary cells
KR20220034838A (ko) * 2019-07-22 2022-03-18 에프쥐 이노베이션 컴퍼니 리미티드 빔 장애 복구를 수행하는 방법 및 관련 디바이스

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109005548A (zh) * 2017-06-06 2018-12-14 华为技术有限公司 一种信道质量信息的上报方法及装置
US20190110281A1 (en) * 2017-10-06 2019-04-11 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques and apparatuses for using a second link for beam failure recovery of a first link
CN110289896A (zh) * 2018-03-15 2019-09-27 索尼公司 电子装置、无线通信方法以及计算机可读介质

Non-Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
HUAWEI, HISILICON: "Discussion on SCell BFR measurements for NR eMIMO", 3GPP DRAFT; R4-1911920, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG4, no. Chongqing , China; 20191014 - 20191018, 4 October 2019 (2019-10-04), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, XP051794140 *
HUAWEI, HISILICON: "Procedure Details for Beam Failure Recovery", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1712224, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. Prague, Czech Republic; 20170821 - 20170825, 20 August 2017 (2017-08-20), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, XP051315041 *
See also references of EP4033852A4 *

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11457446B2 (en) * 2017-12-29 2022-09-27 Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp., Ltd. Method, terminal device and computer storage medium for beam selection based on geographical positions of terminal devices
WO2025236997A1 (zh) * 2024-05-11 2025-11-20 中信科智联科技有限公司 波束管理方法、装置、设备、存储介质及程序产品

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN114175846B (zh) 2024-05-17
EP4033852A1 (en) 2022-07-27
CN114175846A (zh) 2022-03-11
EP4033852A4 (en) 2022-11-02
US12218736B2 (en) 2025-02-04
US20220271822A1 (en) 2022-08-25

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021092939A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
US12245253B2 (en) Systems and methods for resource allocation and encoding of inter-UE coordination messages
US12167456B2 (en) Methods and apparatus for inter-UE coordinated resource allocation in wireless communication
US20230038246A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2020238428A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
WO2021026738A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法、终端设备和网络设备
US20230044818A1 (en) Communication method, apparatus, and system
WO2021051364A1 (zh) 一种通信方法、装置及设备
CN113810964B (zh) 一种通信方法及设备
WO2021204173A1 (zh) 一种资源确定的方法、装置及终端设备
US20220264539A1 (en) Resource Selection Method and Apparatus
WO2021018295A1 (zh) 一种反馈信息传输方法及装置
US12598045B2 (en) Indication information transmission method, apparatus, and system
CN115334479A (zh) 通信方法、装置及系统
WO2021114043A1 (zh) 设备到设备的通信方法和通信装置
CN112584430B (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
CN113938946A (zh) 通信方法及装置
WO2024169584A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及相关设备
WO2021073483A1 (zh) 一种侧行信息的传输方法、装置及系统
CN114073166B (zh) 一种恢复传输的方法、装置及设备
CN113302991B (zh) 用于信号同步的方法、装置和系统
CN114600525B (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
CN111836372B (zh) 一种通信方法及设备
CN120457758A (zh) 用户设备和侧行通信中的波束管理方法
WO2021097767A1 (zh) 一种数据传输的方法、装置和系统

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19952901

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2019952901

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20220421

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE